Multi Select

Package gofpdf implements a PDF document generator with high level support for text, drawing and images. - UTF-8 support - Choice of measurement unit, page format and margins - Page header and footer management - Automatic page breaks, line breaks, and text justification - Inclusion of JPEG, PNG, GIF, TIFF and basic path-only SVG images - Colors, gradients and alpha channel transparency - Outline bookmarks - Internal and external links - TrueType, Type1 and encoding support - Page compression - Lines, Bézier curves, arcs, and ellipses - Rotation, scaling, skewing, translation, and mirroring - Clipping - Document protection - Layers - Templates - Barcodes - Charting facility - Import PDFs as templates gofpdf has no dependencies other than the Go standard library. All tests pass on Linux, Mac and Windows platforms. gofpdf supports UTF-8 TrueType fonts and “right-to-left” languages. Note that Chinese, Japanese, and Korean characters may not be included in many general purpose fonts. For these languages, a specialized font (for example, NotoSansSC for simplified Chinese) can be used. Also, support is provided to automatically translate UTF-8 runes to code page encodings for languages that have fewer than 256 glyphs. This repository will not be maintained, at least for some unknown duration. But it is hoped that gofpdf has a bright future in the open source world. Due to Go’s promise of compatibility, gofpdf should continue to function without modification for a longer time than would be the case with many other languages. Forks should be based on the last viable commit. Tools such as active-forks can be used to select a fork that looks promising for your needs. If a particular fork looks like it has taken the lead in attracting followers, this README will be updated to point people in that direction. The efforts of all contributors to this project have been deeply appreciated. Best wishes to all of you. To install the package on your system, run Later, to receive updates, run The following Go code generates a simple PDF file. See the functions in the fpdf_test.go file (shown as examples in this documentation) for more advanced PDF examples. If an error occurs in an Fpdf method, an internal error field is set. After this occurs, Fpdf method calls typically return without performing any operations and the error state is retained. This error management scheme facilitates PDF generation since individual method calls do not need to be examined for failure; it is generally sufficient to wait until after Output() is called. For the same reason, if an error occurs in the calling application during PDF generation, it may be desirable for the application to transfer the error to the Fpdf instance by calling the SetError() method or the SetErrorf() method. At any time during the life cycle of the Fpdf instance, the error state can be determined with a call to Ok() or Err(). The error itself can be retrieved with a call to Error(). This package is a relatively straightforward translation from the original FPDF library written in PHP (despite the caveat in the introduction to Effective Go). The API names have been retained even though the Go idiom would suggest otherwise (for example, pdf.GetX() is used rather than simply pdf.X()). The similarity of the two libraries makes the original FPDF website a good source of information. It includes a forum and FAQ. However, some internal changes have been made. Page content is built up using buffers (of type bytes.Buffer) rather than repeated string concatenation. Errors are handled as explained above rather than panicking. Output is generated through an interface of type io.Writer or io.WriteCloser. A number of the original PHP methods behave differently based on the type of the arguments that are passed to them; in these cases additional methods have been exported to provide similar functionality. Font definition files are produced in JSON rather than PHP. A side effect of running go test ./... is the production of a number of example PDFs. These can be found in the gofpdf/pdf directory after the tests complete. Please note that these examples run in the context of a test. In order run an example as a standalone application, you’ll need to examine fpdf_test.go for some helper routines, for example exampleFilename() and summary(). Example PDFs can be compared with reference copies in order to verify that they have been generated as expected. This comparison will be performed if a PDF with the same name as the example PDF is placed in the gofpdf/pdf/reference directory and if the third argument to ComparePDFFiles() in internal/example/example.go is true. (By default it is false.) The routine that summarizes an example will look for this file and, if found, will call ComparePDFFiles() to check the example PDF for equality with its reference PDF. If differences exist between the two files they will be printed to standard output and the test will fail. If the reference file is missing, the comparison is considered to succeed. In order to successfully compare two PDFs, the placement of internal resources must be consistent and the internal creation timestamps must be the same. To do this, the methods SetCatalogSort() and SetCreationDate() need to be called for both files. This is done automatically for all examples. Nothing special is required to use the standard PDF fonts (courier, helvetica, times, zapfdingbats) in your documents other than calling SetFont(). You should use AddUTF8Font() or AddUTF8FontFromBytes() to add a TrueType UTF-8 encoded font. Use RTL() and LTR() methods switch between “right-to-left” and “left-to-right” mode. In order to use a different non-UTF-8 TrueType or Type1 font, you will need to generate a font definition file and, if the font will be embedded into PDFs, a compressed version of the font file. This is done by calling the MakeFont function or using the included makefont command line utility. To create the utility, cd into the makefont subdirectory and run “go build”. This will produce a standalone executable named makefont. Select the appropriate encoding file from the font subdirectory and run the command as in the following example. In your PDF generation code, call AddFont() to load the font and, as with the standard fonts, SetFont() to begin using it. Most examples, including the package example, demonstrate this method. Good sources of free, open-source fonts include Google Fonts and DejaVu Fonts. The draw2d package is a two dimensional vector graphics library that can generate output in different forms. It uses gofpdf for its document production mode. gofpdf is a global community effort and you are invited to make it even better. If you have implemented a new feature or corrected a problem, please consider contributing your change to the project. A contribution that does not directly pertain to the core functionality of gofpdf should be placed in its own directory directly beneath the contrib directory. Here are guidelines for making submissions. Your change should - be compatible with the MIT License - be properly documented - be formatted with go fmt - include an example in fpdf_test.go if appropriate - conform to the standards of golint and go vet, that is, golint . and go vet . should not generate any warnings - not diminish test coverage Pull requests are the preferred means of accepting your changes. gofpdf is released under the MIT License. It is copyrighted by Kurt Jung and the contributors acknowledged below. This package’s code and documentation are closely derived from the FPDF library created by Olivier Plathey, and a number of font and image resources are copied directly from it. Bruno Michel has provided valuable assistance with the code. Drawing support is adapted from the FPDF geometric figures script by David Hernández Sanz. Transparency support is adapted from the FPDF transparency script by Martin Hall-May. Support for gradients and clipping is adapted from FPDF scripts by Andreas Würmser. Support for outline bookmarks is adapted from Olivier Plathey by Manuel Cornes. Layer support is adapted from Olivier Plathey. Support for transformations is adapted from the FPDF transformation script by Moritz Wagner and Andreas Würmser. PDF protection is adapted from the work of Klemen Vodopivec for the FPDF product. Lawrence Kesteloot provided code to allow an image’s extent to be determined prior to placement. Support for vertical alignment within a cell was provided by Stefan Schroeder. Ivan Daniluk generalized the font and image loading code to use the Reader interface while maintaining backward compatibility. Anthony Starks provided code for the Polygon function. Robert Lillack provided the Beziergon function and corrected some naming issues with the internal curve function. Claudio Felber provided implementations for dashed line drawing and generalized font loading. Stani Michiels provided support for multi-segment path drawing with smooth line joins, line join styles, enhanced fill modes, and has helped greatly with package presentation and tests. Templating is adapted by Marcus Downing from the FPDF_Tpl library created by Jan Slabon and Setasign. Jelmer Snoeck contributed packages that generate a variety of barcodes and help with registering images on the web. Jelmer Snoek and Guillermo Pascual augmented the basic HTML functionality with aligned text. Kent Quirk implemented backwards-compatible support for reading DPI from images that support it, and for setting DPI manually and then having it properly taken into account when calculating image size. Paulo Coutinho provided support for static embedded fonts. Dan Meyers added support for embedded JavaScript. David Fish added a generic alias-replacement function to enable, among other things, table of contents functionality. Andy Bakun identified and corrected a problem in which the internal catalogs were not sorted stably. Paul Montag added encoding and decoding functionality for templates, including images that are embedded in templates; this allows templates to be stored independently of gofpdf. Paul also added support for page boxes used in printing PDF documents. Wojciech Matusiak added supported for word spacing. Artem Korotkiy added support of UTF-8 fonts. Dave Barnes added support for imported objects and templates. Brigham Thompson added support for rounded rectangles. Joe Westcott added underline functionality and optimized image storage. Benoit KUGLER contributed support for rectangles with corners of unequal radius, modification times, and for file attachments and annotations. - Remove all legacy code page font support; use UTF-8 exclusively - Improve test coverage as reported by the coverage tool. Example demonstrates the generation of a simple PDF document. Note that since only core fonts are used (in this case Arial, a synonym for Helvetica), an empty string can be specified for the font directory in the call to New(). Note also that the example.Filename() and example.Summary() functions belong to a separate, internal package and are not part of the gofpdf library. If an error occurs at some point during the construction of the document, subsequent method calls exit immediately and the error is finally retrieved with the output call where it can be handled by the application.

Package ql implements a pure Go embedded SQL database engine. QL is a member of the SQL family of languages. It is less complex and less powerful than SQL (whichever specification SQL is considered to be). 2018-08-02: Release v1.2.0 adds initial support for Go modules. 2017-01-10: Release v1.1.0 fixes some bugs and adds a configurable WAL headroom. 2016-07-29: Release v1.0.6 enables alternatively using = instead of == for equality operation. 2016-07-11: Release v1.0.5 undoes vendoring of lldb. QL now uses stable lldb (github.com/cznic/lldb). 2016-07-06: Release v1.0.4 fixes a panic when closing the WAL file. 2016-04-03: Release v1.0.3 fixes a data race. 2016-03-23: Release v1.0.2 vendors github.com/cznic/exp/lldb and github.com/camlistore/go4/lock. 2016-03-17: Release v1.0.1 adjusts for latest goyacc. Parser error messages are improved and changed, but their exact form is not considered a API change. 2016-03-05: The current version has been tagged v1.0.0. 2015-06-15: To improve compatibility with other SQL implementations, the count built-in aggregate function now accepts * as its argument. 2015-05-29: The execution planner was rewritten from scratch. It should use indices in all places where they were used before plus in some additional situations. It is possible to investigate the plan using the newly added EXPLAIN statement. The QL tool is handy for such analysis. If the planner would have used an index, but no such exists, the plan includes hints in form of copy/paste ready CREATE INDEX statements. The planner is still quite simple and a lot of work on it is yet ahead. You can help this process by filling an issue with a schema and query which fails to use an index or indices when it should, in your opinion. Bonus points for including output of `ql 'explain <query>'`. 2015-05-09: The grammar of the CREATE INDEX statement now accepts an expression list instead of a single expression, which was further limited to just a column name or the built-in id(). As a side effect, composite indices are now functional. However, the values in the expression-list style index are not yet used by other statements or the statement/query planner. The composite index is useful while having UNIQUE clause to check for semantically duplicate rows before they get added to the table or when such a row is mutated using the UPDATE statement and the expression-list style index tuple of the row is thus recomputed. 2015-05-02: The Schema field of table __Table now correctly reflects any column constraints and/or defaults. Also, the (*DB).Info method now has that information provided in new ColumInfo fields NotNull, Constraint and Default. 2015-04-20: Added support for {LEFT,RIGHT,FULL} [OUTER] JOIN. 2015-04-18: Column definitions can now have constraints and defaults. Details are discussed in the "Constraints and defaults" chapter below the CREATE TABLE statement documentation. 2015-03-06: New built-in functions formatFloat and formatInt. Thanks urandom! (https://github.com/urandom) 2015-02-16: IN predicate now accepts a SELECT statement. See the updated "Predicates" section. 2015-01-17: Logical operators || and && have now alternative spellings: OR and AND (case insensitive). AND was a keyword before, but OR is a new one. This can possibly break existing queries. For the record, it's a good idea to not use any name appearing in, for example, [7] in your queries as the list of QL's keywords may expand for gaining better compatibility with existing SQL "standards". 2015-01-12: ACID guarantees were tightened at the cost of performance in some cases. The write collecting window mechanism, a formerly used implementation detail, was removed. Inserting rows one by one in a transaction is now slow. I mean very slow. Try to avoid inserting single rows in a transaction. Instead, whenever possible, perform batch updates of tens to, say thousands of rows in a single transaction. See also: http://www.sqlite.org/faq.html#q19, the discussed synchronization principles involved are the same as for QL, modulo minor details. Note: A side effect is that closing a DB before exiting an application, both for the Go API and through database/sql driver, is no more required, strictly speaking. Beware that exiting an application while there is an open (uncommitted) transaction in progress means losing the transaction data. However, the DB will not become corrupted because of not closing it. Nor that was the case before, but formerly failing to close a DB could have resulted in losing the data of the last transaction. 2014-09-21: id() now optionally accepts a single argument - a table name. 2014-09-01: Added the DB.Flush() method and the LIKE pattern matching predicate. 2014-08-08: The built in functions max and min now accept also time values. Thanks opennota! (https://github.com/opennota) 2014-06-05: RecordSet interface extended by new methods FirstRow and Rows. 2014-06-02: Indices on id() are now used by SELECT statements. 2014-05-07: Introduction of Marshal, Schema, Unmarshal. 2014-04-15: Added optional IF NOT EXISTS clause to CREATE INDEX and optional IF EXISTS clause to DROP INDEX. 2014-04-12: The column Unique in the virtual table __Index was renamed to IsUnique because the old name is a keyword. Unfortunately, this is a breaking change, sorry. 2014-04-11: Introduction of LIMIT, OFFSET. 2014-04-10: Introduction of query rewriting. 2014-04-07: Introduction of indices. QL imports zappy[8], a block-based compressor, which speeds up its performance by using a C version of the compression/decompression algorithms. If a CGO-free (pure Go) version of QL, or an app using QL, is required, please include 'purego' in the -tags option of go {build,get,install}. For example: If zappy was installed before installing QL, it might be necessary to rebuild zappy first (or rebuild QL with all its dependencies using the -a option): The syntax is specified using Extended Backus-Naur Form (EBNF) Lower-case production names are used to identify lexical tokens. Non-terminals are in CamelCase. Lexical tokens are enclosed in double quotes "" or back quotes “. The form a … b represents the set of characters from a through b as alternatives. The horizontal ellipsis … is also used elsewhere in the spec to informally denote various enumerations or code snippets that are not further specified. QL source code is Unicode text encoded in UTF-8. The text is not canonicalized, so a single accented code point is distinct from the same character constructed from combining an accent and a letter; those are treated as two code points. For simplicity, this document will use the unqualified term character to refer to a Unicode code point in the source text. Each code point is distinct; for instance, upper and lower case letters are different characters. Implementation restriction: For compatibility with other tools, the parser may disallow the NUL character (U+0000) in the statement. Implementation restriction: A byte order mark is disallowed anywhere in QL statements. The following terms are used to denote specific character classes The underscore character _ (U+005F) is considered a letter. Lexical elements are comments, tokens, identifiers, keywords, operators and delimiters, integer, floating-point, imaginary, rune and string literals and QL parameters. Line comments start with the character sequence // or -- and stop at the end of the line. A line comment acts like a space. General comments start with the character sequence /* and continue through the character sequence */. A general comment acts like a space. Comments do not nest. Tokens form the vocabulary of QL. There are four classes: identifiers, keywords, operators and delimiters, and literals. White space, formed from spaces (U+0020), horizontal tabs (U+0009), carriage returns (U+000D), and newlines (U+000A), is ignored except as it separates tokens that would otherwise combine into a single token. The formal grammar uses semicolons ";" as separators of QL statements. A single QL statement or the last QL statement in a list of statements can have an optional semicolon terminator. (Actually a separator from the following empty statement.) Identifiers name entities such as tables or record set columns. An identifier is a sequence of one or more letters and digits. The first character in an identifier must be a letter. For example No identifiers are predeclared, however note that no keyword can be used as an identifier. Identifiers starting with two underscores are used for meta data virtual tables names. For forward compatibility, users should generally avoid using any identifiers starting with two underscores. For example The following keywords are reserved and may not be used as identifiers. Keywords are not case sensitive. The following character sequences represent operators, delimiters, and other special tokens Operators consisting of more than one character are referred to by names in the rest of the documentation An integer literal is a sequence of digits representing an integer constant. An optional prefix sets a non-decimal base: 0 for octal, 0x or 0X for hexadecimal. In hexadecimal literals, letters a-f and A-F represent values 10 through 15. For example A floating-point literal is a decimal representation of a floating-point constant. It has an integer part, a decimal point, a fractional part, and an exponent part. The integer and fractional part comprise decimal digits; the exponent part is an e or E followed by an optionally signed decimal exponent. One of the integer part or the fractional part may be elided; one of the decimal point or the exponent may be elided. For example An imaginary literal is a decimal representation of the imaginary part of a complex constant. It consists of a floating-point literal or decimal integer followed by the lower-case letter i. For example A rune literal represents a rune constant, an integer value identifying a Unicode code point. A rune literal is expressed as one or more characters enclosed in single quotes. Within the quotes, any character may appear except single quote and newline. A single quoted character represents the Unicode value of the character itself, while multi-character sequences beginning with a backslash encode values in various formats. The simplest form represents the single character within the quotes; since QL statements are Unicode characters encoded in UTF-8, multiple UTF-8-encoded bytes may represent a single integer value. For instance, the literal 'a' holds a single byte representing a literal a, Unicode U+0061, value 0x61, while 'ä' holds two bytes (0xc3 0xa4) representing a literal a-dieresis, U+00E4, value 0xe4. Several backslash escapes allow arbitrary values to be encoded as ASCII text. There are four ways to represent the integer value as a numeric constant: \x followed by exactly two hexadecimal digits; \u followed by exactly four hexadecimal digits; \U followed by exactly eight hexadecimal digits, and a plain backslash \ followed by exactly three octal digits. In each case the value of the literal is the value represented by the digits in the corresponding base. Although these representations all result in an integer, they have different valid ranges. Octal escapes must represent a value between 0 and 255 inclusive. Hexadecimal escapes satisfy this condition by construction. The escapes \u and \U represent Unicode code points so within them some values are illegal, in particular those above 0x10FFFF and surrogate halves. After a backslash, certain single-character escapes represent special values All other sequences starting with a backslash are illegal inside rune literals. For example A string literal represents a string constant obtained from concatenating a sequence of characters. There are two forms: raw string literals and interpreted string literals. Raw string literals are character sequences between back quotes “. Within the quotes, any character is legal except back quote. The value of a raw string literal is the string composed of the uninterpreted (implicitly UTF-8-encoded) characters between the quotes; in particular, backslashes have no special meaning and the string may contain newlines. Carriage returns inside raw string literals are discarded from the raw string value. Interpreted string literals are character sequences between double quotes "". The text between the quotes, which may not contain newlines, forms the value of the literal, with backslash escapes interpreted as they are in rune literals (except that \' is illegal and \" is legal), with the same restrictions. The three-digit octal (\nnn) and two-digit hexadecimal (\xnn) escapes represent individual bytes of the resulting string; all other escapes represent the (possibly multi-byte) UTF-8 encoding of individual characters. Thus inside a string literal \377 and \xFF represent a single byte of value 0xFF=255, while ÿ, \u00FF, \U000000FF and \xc3\xbf represent the two bytes 0xc3 0xbf of the UTF-8 encoding of character U+00FF. For example These examples all represent the same string If the statement source represents a character as two code points, such as a combining form involving an accent and a letter, the result will be an error if placed in a rune literal (it is not a single code point), and will appear as two code points if placed in a string literal. Literals are assigned their values from the respective text representation at "compile" (parse) time. QL parameters provide the same functionality as literals, but their value is assigned at execution time from an expression list passed to DB.Run or DB.Execute. Using '?' or '$' is completely equivalent. For example Keywords 'false' and 'true' (not case sensitive) represent the two possible constant values of type bool (also not case sensitive). Keyword 'NULL' (not case sensitive) represents an untyped constant which is assignable to any type. NULL is distinct from any other value of any type. A type determines the set of values and operations specific to values of that type. A type is specified by a type name. Named instances of the boolean, numeric, and string types are keywords. The names are not case sensitive. Note: The blob type is exchanged between the back end and the API as []byte. On 32 bit platforms this limits the size which the implementation can handle to 2G. A boolean type represents the set of Boolean truth values denoted by the predeclared constants true and false. The predeclared boolean type is bool. A duration type represents the elapsed time between two instants as an int64 nanosecond count. The representation limits the largest representable duration to approximately 290 years. A numeric type represents sets of integer or floating-point values. The predeclared architecture-independent numeric types are The value of an n-bit integer is n bits wide and represented using two's complement arithmetic. Conversions are required when different numeric types are mixed in an expression or assignment. A string type represents the set of string values. A string value is a (possibly empty) sequence of bytes. The case insensitive keyword for the string type is 'string'. The length of a string (its size in bytes) can be discovered using the built-in function len. A time type represents an instant in time with nanosecond precision. Each time has associated with it a location, consulted when computing the presentation form of the time. The following functions are implicitly declared An expression specifies the computation of a value by applying operators and functions to operands. Operands denote the elementary values in an expression. An operand may be a literal, a (possibly qualified) identifier denoting a constant or a function or a table/record set column, or a parenthesized expression. A qualified identifier is an identifier qualified with a table/record set name prefix. For example Primary expression are the operands for unary and binary expressions. For example A primary expression of the form denotes the element of a string indexed by x. Its type is byte. The value x is called the index. The following rules apply - The index x must be of integer type except bigint or duration; it is in range if 0 <= x < len(s), otherwise it is out of range. - A constant index must be non-negative and representable by a value of type int. - A constant index must be in range if the string a is a literal. - If x is out of range at run time, a run-time error occurs. - s[x] is the byte at index x and the type of s[x] is byte. If s is NULL or x is NULL then the result is NULL. Otherwise s[x] is illegal. For a string, the primary expression constructs a substring. The indices low and high select which elements appear in the result. The result has indices starting at 0 and length equal to high - low. For convenience, any of the indices may be omitted. A missing low index defaults to zero; a missing high index defaults to the length of the sliced operand The indices low and high are in range if 0 <= low <= high <= len(a), otherwise they are out of range. A constant index must be non-negative and representable by a value of type int. If both indices are constant, they must satisfy low <= high. If the indices are out of range at run time, a run-time error occurs. Integer values of type bigint or duration cannot be used as indices. If s is NULL the result is NULL. If low or high is not omitted and is NULL then the result is NULL. Given an identifier f denoting a predeclared function, calls f with arguments a1, a2, … an. Arguments are evaluated before the function is called. The type of the expression is the result type of f. In a function call, the function value and arguments are evaluated in the usual order. After they are evaluated, the parameters of the call are passed by value to the function and the called function begins execution. The return value of the function is passed by value when the function returns. Calling an undefined function causes a compile-time error. Operators combine operands into expressions. Comparisons are discussed elsewhere. For other binary operators, the operand types must be identical unless the operation involves shifts or untyped constants. For operations involving constants only, see the section on constant expressions. Except for shift operations, if one operand is an untyped constant and the other operand is not, the constant is converted to the type of the other operand. The right operand in a shift expression must have unsigned integer type or be an untyped constant that can be converted to unsigned integer type. If the left operand of a non-constant shift expression is an untyped constant, the type of the constant is what it would be if the shift expression were replaced by its left operand alone. Expressions of the form yield a boolean value true if expr2, a regular expression, matches expr1 (see also [6]). Both expression must be of type string. If any one of the expressions is NULL the result is NULL. Predicates are special form expressions having a boolean result type. Expressions of the form are equivalent, including NULL handling, to The types of involved expressions must be comparable as defined in "Comparison operators". Another form of the IN predicate creates the expression list from a result of a SelectStmt. The SelectStmt must select only one column. The produced expression list is resource limited by the memory available to the process. NULL values produced by the SelectStmt are ignored, but if all records of the SelectStmt are NULL the predicate yields NULL. The select statement is evaluated only once. If the type of expr is not the same as the type of the field returned by the SelectStmt then the set operation yields false. The type of the column returned by the SelectStmt must be one of the simple (non blob-like) types: Expressions of the form are equivalent, including NULL handling, to The types of involved expressions must be ordered as defined in "Comparison operators". Expressions of the form yield a boolean value true if expr does not have a specific type (case A) or if expr has a specific type (case B). In other cases the result is a boolean value false. Unary operators have the highest precedence. There are five precedence levels for binary operators. Multiplication operators bind strongest, followed by addition operators, comparison operators, && (logical AND), and finally || (logical OR) Binary operators of the same precedence associate from left to right. For instance, x / y * z is the same as (x / y) * z. Note that the operator precedence is reflected explicitly by the grammar. Arithmetic operators apply to numeric values and yield a result of the same type as the first operand. The four standard arithmetic operators (+, -, *, /) apply to integer, rational, floating-point, and complex types; + also applies to strings; +,- also applies to times. All other arithmetic operators apply to integers only. sum integers, rationals, floats, complex values, strings difference integers, rationals, floats, complex values, times product integers, rationals, floats, complex values / quotient integers, rationals, floats, complex values % remainder integers & bitwise AND integers | bitwise OR integers ^ bitwise XOR integers &^ bit clear (AND NOT) integers << left shift integer << unsigned integer >> right shift integer >> unsigned integer Strings can be concatenated using the + operator String addition creates a new string by concatenating the operands. A value of type duration can be added to or subtracted from a value of type time. Times can subtracted from each other producing a value of type duration. For two integer values x and y, the integer quotient q = x / y and remainder r = x % y satisfy the following relationships with x / y truncated towards zero ("truncated division"). As an exception to this rule, if the dividend x is the most negative value for the int type of x, the quotient q = x / -1 is equal to x (and r = 0). If the divisor is a constant expression, it must not be zero. If the divisor is zero at run time, a run-time error occurs. If the dividend is non-negative and the divisor is a constant power of 2, the division may be replaced by a right shift, and computing the remainder may be replaced by a bitwise AND operation The shift operators shift the left operand by the shift count specified by the right operand. They implement arithmetic shifts if the left operand is a signed integer and logical shifts if it is an unsigned integer. There is no upper limit on the shift count. Shifts behave as if the left operand is shifted n times by 1 for a shift count of n. As a result, x << 1 is the same as x*2 and x >> 1 is the same as x/2 but truncated towards negative infinity. For integer operands, the unary operators +, -, and ^ are defined as follows For floating-point and complex numbers, +x is the same as x, while -x is the negation of x. The result of a floating-point or complex division by zero is not specified beyond the IEEE-754 standard; whether a run-time error occurs is implementation-specific. Whenever any operand of any arithmetic operation, unary or binary, is NULL, as well as in the case of the string concatenating operation, the result is NULL. For unsigned integer values, the operations +, -, *, and << are computed modulo 2n, where n is the bit width of the unsigned integer's type. Loosely speaking, these unsigned integer operations discard high bits upon overflow, and expressions may rely on “wrap around”. For signed integers with a finite bit width, the operations +, -, *, and << may legally overflow and the resulting value exists and is deterministically defined by the signed integer representation, the operation, and its operands. No exception is raised as a result of overflow. An evaluator may not optimize an expression under the assumption that overflow does not occur. For instance, it may not assume that x < x + 1 is always true. Integers of type bigint and rationals do not overflow but their handling is limited by the memory resources available to the program. Comparison operators compare two operands and yield a boolean value. In any comparison, the first operand must be of same type as is the second operand, or vice versa. The equality operators == and != apply to operands that are comparable. The ordering operators <, <=, >, and >= apply to operands that are ordered. These terms and the result of the comparisons are defined as follows - Boolean values are comparable. Two boolean values are equal if they are either both true or both false. - Complex values are comparable. Two complex values u and v are equal if both real(u) == real(v) and imag(u) == imag(v). - Integer values are comparable and ordered, in the usual way. Note that durations are integers. - Floating point values are comparable and ordered, as defined by the IEEE-754 standard. - Rational values are comparable and ordered, in the usual way. - String and Blob values are comparable and ordered, lexically byte-wise. - Time values are comparable and ordered. Whenever any operand of any comparison operation is NULL, the result is NULL. Note that slices are always of type string. Logical operators apply to boolean values and yield a boolean result. The right operand is evaluated conditionally. The truth tables for logical operations with NULL values Conversions are expressions of the form T(x) where T is a type and x is an expression that can be converted to type T. A constant value x can be converted to type T in any of these cases: - x is representable by a value of type T. - x is a floating-point constant, T is a floating-point type, and x is representable by a value of type T after rounding using IEEE 754 round-to-even rules. The constant T(x) is the rounded value. - x is an integer constant and T is a string type. The same rule as for non-constant x applies in this case. Converting a constant yields a typed constant as result. A non-constant value x can be converted to type T in any of these cases: - x has type T. - x's type and T are both integer or floating point types. - x's type and T are both complex types. - x is an integer, except bigint or duration, and T is a string type. Specific rules apply to (non-constant) conversions between numeric types or to and from a string type. These conversions may change the representation of x and incur a run-time cost. All other conversions only change the type but not the representation of x. A conversion of NULL to any type yields NULL. For the conversion of non-constant numeric values, the following rules apply 1. When converting between integer types, if the value is a signed integer, it is sign extended to implicit infinite precision; otherwise it is zero extended. It is then truncated to fit in the result type's size. For example, if v == uint16(0x10F0), then uint32(int8(v)) == 0xFFFFFFF0. The conversion always yields a valid value; there is no indication of overflow. 2. When converting a floating-point number to an integer, the fraction is discarded (truncation towards zero). 3. When converting an integer or floating-point number to a floating-point type, or a complex number to another complex type, the result value is rounded to the precision specified by the destination type. For instance, the value of a variable x of type float32 may be stored using additional precision beyond that of an IEEE-754 32-bit number, but float32(x) represents the result of rounding x's value to 32-bit precision. Similarly, x + 0.1 may use more than 32 bits of precision, but float32(x + 0.1) does not. In all non-constant conversions involving floating-point or complex values, if the result type cannot represent the value the conversion succeeds but the result value is implementation-dependent. 1. Converting a signed or unsigned integer value to a string type yields a string containing the UTF-8 representation of the integer. Values outside the range of valid Unicode code points are converted to "\uFFFD". 2. Converting a blob to a string type yields a string whose successive bytes are the elements of the blob. 3. Converting a value of a string type to a blob yields a blob whose successive elements are the bytes of the string. 4. Converting a value of a bigint type to a string yields a string containing the decimal decimal representation of the integer. 5. Converting a value of a string type to a bigint yields a bigint value containing the integer represented by the string value. A prefix of “0x” or “0X” selects base 16; the “0” prefix selects base 8, and a “0b” or “0B” prefix selects base 2. Otherwise the value is interpreted in base 10. An error occurs if the string value is not in any valid format. 6. Converting a value of a rational type to a string yields a string containing the decimal decimal representation of the rational in the form "a/b" (even if b == 1). 7. Converting a value of a string type to a bigrat yields a bigrat value containing the rational represented by the string value. The string can be given as a fraction "a/b" or as a floating-point number optionally followed by an exponent. An error occurs if the string value is not in any valid format. 8. Converting a value of a duration type to a string returns a string representing the duration in the form "72h3m0.5s". Leading zero units are omitted. As a special case, durations less than one second format using a smaller unit (milli-, micro-, or nanoseconds) to ensure that the leading digit is non-zero. The zero duration formats as 0, with no unit. 9. Converting a string value to a duration yields a duration represented by the string. A duration string is a possibly signed sequence of decimal numbers, each with optional fraction and a unit suffix, such as "300ms", "-1.5h" or "2h45m". Valid time units are "ns", "us" (or "µs"), "ms", "s", "m", "h". 10. Converting a time value to a string returns the time formatted using the format string When evaluating the operands of an expression or of function calls, operations are evaluated in lexical left-to-right order. For example, in the evaluation of the function calls and evaluation of c happen in the order h(), i(), j(), c. Floating-point operations within a single expression are evaluated according to the associativity of the operators. Explicit parentheses affect the evaluation by overriding the default associativity. In the expression x + (y + z) the addition y + z is performed before adding x. Statements control execution. The empty statement does nothing. Alter table statements modify existing tables. With the ADD clause it adds a new column to the table. The column must not exist. With the DROP clause it removes an existing column from a table. The column must exist and it must be not the only (last) column of the table. IOW, there cannot be a table with no columns. For example When adding a column to a table with existing data, the constraint clause of the ColumnDef cannot be used. Adding a constrained column to an empty table is fine. Begin transactions statements introduce a new transaction level. Every transaction level must be eventually balanced by exactly one of COMMIT or ROLLBACK statements. Note that when a transaction is roll-backed because of a statement failure then no explicit balancing of the respective BEGIN TRANSACTION is statement is required nor permitted. Failure to properly balance any opened transaction level may cause dead locks and/or lose of data updated in the uppermost opened but never properly closed transaction level. For example A database cannot be updated (mutated) outside of a transaction. Statements requiring a transaction A database is effectively read only outside of a transaction. Statements not requiring a transaction The commit statement closes the innermost transaction nesting level. If that's the outermost level then the updates to the DB made by the transaction are atomically made persistent. For example Create index statements create new indices. Index is a named projection of ordered values of a table column to the respective records. As a special case the id() of the record can be indexed. Index name must not be the same as any of the existing tables and it also cannot be the same as of any column name of the table the index is on. For example Now certain SELECT statements may use the indices to speed up joins and/or to speed up record set filtering when the WHERE clause is used; or the indices might be used to improve the performance when the ORDER BY clause is present. The UNIQUE modifier requires the indexed values tuple to be index-wise unique or have all values NULL. The optional IF NOT EXISTS clause makes the statement a no operation if the index already exists. A simple index consists of only one expression which must be either a column name or the built-in id(). A more complex and more general index is one that consists of more than one expression or its single expression does not qualify as a simple index. In this case the type of all expressions in the list must be one of the non blob-like types. Note: Blob-like types are blob, bigint, bigrat, time and duration. Create table statements create new tables. A column definition declares the column name and type. Table names and column names are case sensitive. Neither a table or an index of the same name may exist in the DB. For example The optional IF NOT EXISTS clause makes the statement a no operation if the table already exists. The optional constraint clause has two forms. The first one is found in many SQL dialects. This form prevents the data in column DepartmentName to be NULL. The second form allows an arbitrary boolean expression to be used to validate the column. If the value of the expression is true then the validation succeeded. If the value of the expression is false or NULL then the validation fails. If the value of the expression is not of type bool an error occurs. The optional DEFAULT clause is an expression which, if present, is substituted instead of a NULL value when the colum is assigned a value. Note that the constraint and/or default expressions may refer to other columns by name: When a table row is inserted by the INSERT INTO statement or when a table row is updated by the UPDATE statement, the order of operations is as follows: 1. The new values of the affected columns are set and the values of all the row columns become the named values which can be referred to in default expressions evaluated in step 2. 2. If any row column value is NULL and the DEFAULT clause is present in the column's definition, the default expression is evaluated and its value is set as the respective column value. 3. The values, potentially updated, of row columns become the named values which can be referred to in constraint expressions evaluated during step 4. 4. All row columns which definition has the constraint clause present will have that constraint checked. If any constraint violation is detected, the overall operation fails and no changes to the table are made. Delete from statements remove rows from a table, which must exist. For example If the WHERE clause is not present then all rows are removed and the statement is equivalent to the TRUNCATE TABLE statement. Drop index statements remove indices from the DB. The index must exist. For example The optional IF EXISTS clause makes the statement a no operation if the index does not exist. Drop table statements remove tables from the DB. The table must exist. For example The optional IF EXISTS clause makes the statement a no operation if the table does not exist. Insert into statements insert new rows into tables. New rows come from literal data, if using the VALUES clause, or are a result of select statement. In the later case the select statement is fully evaluated before the insertion of any rows is performed, allowing to insert values calculated from the same table rows are to be inserted into. If the ColumnNameList part is omitted then the number of values inserted in the row must be the same as are columns in the table. If the ColumnNameList part is present then the number of values per row must be same as the same number of column names. All other columns of the record are set to NULL. The type of the value assigned to a column must be the same as is the column's type or the value must be NULL. For example If any of the columns of the table were defined using the optional constraints clause or the optional defaults clause then those are processed on a per row basis. The details are discussed in the "Constraints and defaults" chapter below the CREATE TABLE statement documentation. Explain statement produces a recordset consisting of lines of text which describe the execution plan of a statement, if any. For example, the QL tool treats the explain statement specially and outputs the joined lines: The explanation may aid in uderstanding how a statement/query would be executed and if indices are used as expected - or which indices may possibly improve the statement performance. The create index statements above were directly copy/pasted in the terminal from the suggestions provided by the filter recordset pipeline part returned by the explain statement. If the statement has nothing special in its plan, the result is the original statement. To get an explanation of the select statement of the IN predicate, use the EXPLAIN statement with that particular select statement. The rollback statement closes the innermost transaction nesting level discarding any updates to the DB made by it. If that's the outermost level then the effects on the DB are as if the transaction never happened. For example The (temporary) record set from the last statement is returned and can be processed by the client. In this case the rollback is the same as 'DROP TABLE tmp;' but it can be a more complex operation. Select from statements produce recordsets. The optional DISTINCT modifier ensures all rows in the result recordset are unique. Either all of the resulting fields are returned ('*') or only those named in FieldList. RecordSetList is a list of table names or parenthesized select statements, optionally (re)named using the AS clause. The result can be filtered using a WhereClause and orderd by the OrderBy clause. For example If Recordset is a nested, parenthesized SelectStmt then it must be given a name using the AS clause if its field are to be accessible in expressions. A field is an named expression. Identifiers, not used as a type in conversion or a function name in the Call clause, denote names of (other) fields, values of which should be used in the expression. The expression can be named using the AS clause. If the AS clause is not present and the expression consists solely of a field name, then that field name is used as the name of the resulting field. Otherwise the field is unnamed. For example The SELECT statement can optionally enumerate the desired/resulting fields in a list. No two identical field names can appear in the list. When more than one record set is used in the FROM clause record set list, the result record set field names are rewritten to be qualified using the record set names. If a particular record set doesn't have a name, its respective fields became unnamed. The optional JOIN clause, for example is mostly equal to except that the rows from a which, when they appear in the cross join, never made expr to evaluate to true, are combined with a virtual row from b, containing all nulls, and added to the result set. For the RIGHT JOIN variant the discussed rules are used for rows from b not satisfying expr == true and the virtual, all-null row "comes" from a. The FULL JOIN adds the respective rows which would be otherwise provided by the separate executions of the LEFT JOIN and RIGHT JOIN variants. For more thorough OUTER JOIN discussion please see the Wikipedia article at [10]. Resultins rows of a SELECT statement can be optionally ordered by the ORDER BY clause. Collating proceeds by considering the expressions in the expression list left to right until a collating order is determined. Any possibly remaining expressions are not evaluated. All of the expression values must yield an ordered type or NULL. Ordered types are defined in "Comparison operators". Collating of elements having a NULL value is different compared to what the comparison operators yield in expression evaluation (NULL result instead of a boolean value). Below, T denotes a non NULL value of any QL type. NULL collates before any non NULL value (is considered smaller than T). Two NULLs have no collating order (are considered equal). The WHERE clause restricts records considered by some statements, like SELECT FROM, DELETE FROM, or UPDATE. It is an error if the expression evaluates to a non null value of non bool type. Another form of the WHERE clause is an existence predicate of a parenthesized select statement. The EXISTS form evaluates to true if the parenthesized SELECT statement produces a non empty record set. The NOT EXISTS form evaluates to true if the parenthesized SELECT statement produces an empty record set. The parenthesized SELECT statement is evaluated only once (TODO issue #159). The GROUP BY clause is used to project rows having common values into a smaller set of rows. For example Using the GROUP BY without any aggregate functions in the selected fields is in certain cases equal to using the DISTINCT modifier. The last two examples above produce the same resultsets. The optional OFFSET clause allows to ignore first N records. For example The above will produce only rows 11, 12, ... of the record set, if they exist. The value of the expression must a non negative integer, but not bigint or duration. The optional LIMIT clause allows to ignore all but first N records. For example The above will return at most the first 10 records of the record set. The value of the expression must a non negative integer, but not bigint or duration. The LIMIT and OFFSET clauses can be combined. For example Considering table t has, say 10 records, the above will produce only records 4 - 8. After returning record #8, no more result rows/records are computed. 1. The FROM clause is evaluated, producing a Cartesian product of its source record sets (tables or nested SELECT statements). 2. If present, the JOIN cluase is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation and the recordset specified by the JOIN clause. (... JOIN Recordset ON ...) 3. If present, the WHERE clause is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation. 4. If present, the GROUP BY clause is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). 5. The SELECT field expressions are evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). 6. If present, the DISTINCT modifier is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). 7. If present, the ORDER BY clause is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). 8. If present, the OFFSET clause is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). The offset expression is evaluated once for the first record produced by the previous evaluations. 9. If present, the LIMIT clause is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). The limit expression is evaluated once for the first record produced by the previous evaluations. Truncate table statements remove all records from a table. The table must exist. For example Update statements change values of fields in rows of a table. For example Note: The SET clause is optional. If any of the columns of the table were defined using the optional constraints clause or the optional defaults clause then those are processed on a per row basis. The details are discussed in the "Constraints and defaults" chapter below the CREATE TABLE statement documentation. To allow to query for DB meta data, there exist specially named tables, some of them being virtual. Note: Virtual system tables may have fake table-wise unique but meaningless and unstable record IDs. Do not apply the built-in id() to any system table. The table __Table lists all tables in the DB. The schema is The Schema column returns the statement to (re)create table Name. This table is virtual. The table __Colum lists all columns of all tables in the DB. The schema is The Ordinal column defines the 1-based index of the column in the record. This table is virtual. The table __Colum2 lists all columns of all tables in the DB which have the constraint NOT NULL or which have a constraint expression defined or which have a default expression defined. The schema is It's possible to obtain a consolidated recordset for all properties of all DB columns using The Name column is the column name in TableName. The table __Index lists all indices in the DB. The schema is The IsUnique columns reflects if the index was created using the optional UNIQUE clause. This table is virtual. Built-in functions are predeclared. The built-in aggregate function avg returns the average of values of an expression. Avg ignores NULL values, but returns NULL if all values of a column are NULL or if avg is applied to an empty record set. The column values must be of a numeric type. The built-in function contains returns true if substr is within s. If any argument to contains is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in aggregate function count returns how many times an expression has a non NULL values or the number of rows in a record set. Note: count() returns 0 for an empty record set. For example Date returns the time corresponding to in the appropriate zone for that time in the given location. The month, day, hour, min, sec, and nsec values may be outside their usual ranges and will be normalized during the conversion. For example, October 32 converts to November 1. A daylight savings time transition skips or repeats times. For example, in the United States, March 13, 2011 2:15am never occurred, while November 6, 2011 1:15am occurred twice. In such cases, the choice of time zone, and therefore the time, is not well-defined. Date returns a time that is correct in one of the two zones involved in the transition, but it does not guarantee which. A location maps time instants to the zone in use at that time. Typically, the location represents the collection of time offsets in use in a geographical area, such as "CEST" and "CET" for central Europe. "local" represents the system's local time zone. "UTC" represents Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). The month specifies a month of the year (January = 1, ...). If any argument to date is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function day returns the day of the month specified by t. If the argument to day is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function formatTime returns a textual representation of the time value formatted according to layout, which defines the format by showing how the reference time, would be displayed if it were the value; it serves as an example of the desired output. The same display rules will then be applied to the time value. If any argument to formatTime is NULL the result is NULL. NOTE: The string value of the time zone, like "CET" or "ACDT", is dependent on the time zone of the machine the function is run on. For example, if the t value is in "CET", but the machine is in "ACDT", instead of "CET" the result is "+0100". This is the same what Go (time.Time).String() returns and in fact formatTime directly calls t.String(). returns on a machine in the CET time zone, but may return on a machine in the ACDT zone. The time value is in both cases the same so its ordering and comparing is correct. Only the display value can differ. The built-in functions formatFloat and formatInt format numbers to strings using go's number format functions in the `strconv` package. For all three functions, only the first argument is mandatory. The default values of the rest are shown in the examples. If the first argument is NULL, the result is NULL. returns returns returns Unlike the `strconv` equivalent, the formatInt function handles all integer types, both signed and unsigned. The built-in function hasPrefix tests whether the string s begins with prefix. If any argument to hasPrefix is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function hasSuffix tests whether the string s ends with suffix. If any argument to hasSuffix is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function hour returns the hour within the day specified by t, in the range [0, 23]. If the argument to hour is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function hours returns the duration as a floating point number of hours. If the argument to hours is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function id takes zero or one arguments. If no argument is provided, id() returns a table-unique automatically assigned numeric identifier of type int. Ids of deleted records are not reused unless the DB becomes completely empty (has no tables). For example If id() without arguments is called for a row which is not a table record then the result value is NULL. For example If id() has one argument it must be a table name of a table in a cross join. For example The built-in function len takes a string argument and returns the lentgh of the string in bytes. The expression len(s) is constant if s is a string constant. If the argument to len is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in aggregate function max returns the largest value of an expression in a record set. Max ignores NULL values, but returns NULL if all values of a column are NULL or if max is applied to an empty record set. The expression values must be of an ordered type. For example The built-in aggregate function min returns the smallest value of an expression in a record set. Min ignores NULL values, but returns NULL if all values of a column are NULL or if min is applied to an empty record set. For example The column values must be of an ordered type. The built-in function minute returns the minute offset within the hour specified by t, in the range [0, 59]. If the argument to minute is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function minutes returns the duration as a floating point number of minutes. If the argument to minutes is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function month returns the month of the year specified by t (January = 1, ...). If the argument to month is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function nanosecond returns the nanosecond offset within the second specified by t, in the range [0, 999999999]. If the argument to nanosecond is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function nanoseconds returns the duration as an integer nanosecond count. If the argument to nanoseconds is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function now returns the current local time. The built-in function parseTime parses a formatted string and returns the time value it represents. The layout defines the format by showing how the reference time, would be interpreted if it were the value; it serves as an example of the input format. The same interpretation will then be made to the input string. Elements omitted from the value are assumed to be zero or, when zero is impossible, one, so parsing "3:04pm" returns the time corresponding to Jan 1, year 0, 15:04:00 UTC (note that because the year is 0, this time is before the zero Time). Years must be in the range 0000..9999. The day of the week is checked for syntax but it is otherwise ignored. In the absence of a time zone indicator, parseTime returns a time in UTC. When parsing a time with a zone offset like -0700, if the offset corresponds to a time zone used by the current location, then parseTime uses that location and zone in the returned time. Otherwise it records the time as being in a fabricated location with time fixed at the given zone offset. When parsing a time with a zone abbreviation like MST, if the zone abbreviation has a defined offset in the current location, then that offset is used. The zone abbreviation "UTC" is recognized as UTC regardless of location. If the zone abbreviation is unknown, Parse records the time as being in a fabricated location with the given zone abbreviation and a zero offset. This choice means that such a time can be parses and reformatted with the same layout losslessly, but the exact instant used in the representation will differ by the actual zone offset. To avoid such problems, prefer time layouts that use a numeric zone offset. If any argument to parseTime is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function second returns the second offset within the minute specified by t, in the range [0, 59]. If the argument to second is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function seconds returns the duration as a floating point number of seconds. If the argument to seconds is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function since returns the time elapsed since t. It is shorthand for now()-t. If the argument to since is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in aggregate function sum returns the sum of values of an expression for all rows of a record set. Sum ignores NULL values, but returns NULL if all values of a column are NULL or if sum is applied to an empty record set. The column values must be of a numeric type. The built-in function timeIn returns t with the location information set to loc. For discussion of the loc argument please see date(). If any argument to timeIn is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function weekday returns the day of the week specified by t. Sunday == 0, Monday == 1, ... If the argument to weekday is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function year returns the year in which t occurs. If the argument to year is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function yearDay returns the day of the year specified by t, in the range [1,365] for non-leap years, and [1,366] in leap years. If the argument to yearDay is NULL the result is NULL. Three functions assemble and disassemble complex numbers. The built-in function complex constructs a complex value from a floating-point real and imaginary part, while real and imag extract the real and imaginary parts of a complex value. The type of the arguments and return value correspond. For complex, the two arguments must be of the same floating-point type and the return type is the complex type with the corresponding floating-point constituents: complex64 for float32, complex128 for float64. The real and imag functions together form the inverse, so for a complex value z, z == complex(real(z), imag(z)). If the operands of these functions are all constants, the return value is a constant. If any argument to any of complex, real, imag functions is NULL the result is NULL. For the numeric types, the following sizes are guaranteed Portions of this specification page are modifications based on work[2] created and shared by Google[3] and used according to terms described in the Creative Commons 3.0 Attribution License[4]. This specification is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution 3.0 License, and code is licensed under a BSD license[5]. Links from the above documentation This section is not part of the specification. WARNING: The implementation of indices is new and it surely needs more time to become mature. Indices are used currently used only by the WHERE clause. The following expression patterns of 'WHERE expression' are recognized and trigger index use. The relOp is one of the relation operators <, <=, ==, >=, >. For the equality operator both operands must be of comparable types. For all other operators both operands must be of ordered types. The constant expression is a compile time constant expression. Some constant folding is still a TODO. Parameter is a QL parameter ($1 etc.). Consider tables t and u, both with an indexed field f. The WHERE expression doesn't comply with the above simple detected cases. However, such query is now automatically rewritten to which will use both of the indices. The impact of using the indices can be substantial (cf. BenchmarkCrossJoin*) if the resulting rows have low "selectivity", ie. only few rows from both tables are selected by the respective WHERE filtering. Note: Existing QL DBs can be used and indices can be added to them. However, once any indices are present in the DB, the old QL versions cannot work with such DB anymore. Running a benchmark with -v (-test.v) outputs information about the scale used to report records/s and a brief description of the benchmark. For example Running the full suite of benchmarks takes a lot of time. Use the -timeout flag to avoid them being killed after the default time limit (10 minutes).

Package cli provides a framework to build command line applications in Go with most of the burden of arguments parsing and validation placed on the framework instead of the user. To create a new application, initialize an app with cli.App. Specify a name and a brief description for the application: To attach code to execute when the app is launched, assign a function to the Action field: To assign a version to the application, use Version method and specify the flags that will be used to invoke the version command: Finally, in the main func, call Run passing in the arguments for parsing: To add one or more command line options (also known as flags), use one of the short-form StringOpt, StringsOpt, IntOpt, IntsOpt, Float64Opt, Floats64Opt, or BoolOpt methods on App (or Cmd if adding flags to a command or a subcommand). For example, to add a boolean flag to the cp command that specifies recursive mode, use the following: or: The first version returns a new pointer to a bool value which will be populated when the app is run, whereas the second version will populate a pointer to an existing variable you specify. The option name(s) is a space separated list of names (without the dashes). The one letter names can then be called with a single dash (short option, -R), the others with two dashes (long options, --recursive). You also specify the default value for the option if it is not supplied by the user. The last parameter is the description to be shown in help messages. There is also a second set of methods on App called String, Strings, Int, Ints, and Bool, which accept a long-form struct of the type: cli.StringOpt, cli.StringsOpt, cli.IntOpt, cli.IntsOpt, cli.Float64Opt, cli.Floats64Opt, cli.BoolOpt. The struct describes the option and allows the use of additional features not available in the short-form methods described above: Or: The first version returns a new pointer to a value which will be populated when the app is run, whereas the second version will populate a pointer to an existing variable you specify. Two features, EnvVar and SetByUser, can be defined in the long-form struct method. EnvVar is a space separated list of environment variables used to initialize the option if a value is not provided by the user. When help messages are shown, the value of any environment variables will be displayed. SetByUser is a pointer to a boolean variable that is set to true if the user specified the value on the command line. This can be useful to determine if the value of the option was explicitly set by the user or set via the default value. You can only access the values stored in the pointers in the Action func, which is invoked after argument parsing has been completed. This precludes using the value of one option as the default value of another. On the command line, the following syntaxes are supported when specifying options. Boolean options: String, int and float options: Slice options (StringsOpt, IntsOpt, Floats64Opt) where option is repeated to accumulate values in a slice: To add one or more command line arguments (not prefixed by dashes), use one of the short-form StringArg, StringsArg, IntArg, IntsArg, Float64Arg, Floats64Arg, or BoolArg methods on App (or Cmd if adding arguments to a command or subcommand). For example, to add two string arguments to our cp command, use the following calls: Or: The first version returns a new pointer to a value which will be populated when the app is run, whereas the second version will populate a pointer to an existing variable you specify. You then specify the argument as will be displayed in help messages. Argument names must be specified as all uppercase. The next parameter is the default value for the argument if it is not supplied. And the last is the description to be shown in help messages. There is also a second set of methods on App called String, Strings, Int, Ints, Float64, Floats64 and Bool, which accept a long-form struct of the type: cli.StringArg, cli.StringsArg, cli.IntArg, cli.IntsArg, cli.BoolArg. The struct describes the arguments and allows the use of additional features not available in the short-form methods described above: Or: The first version returns a new pointer to a value which will be populated when the app is run, whereas the second version will populate a pointer to an existing variable you specify. Two features, EnvVar and SetByUser, can be defined in the long-form struct method. EnvVar is a space separated list of environment variables used to initialize the argument if a value is not provided by the user. When help messages are shown, the value of any environment variables will be displayed. SetByUser is a pointer to a boolean variable that is set to true if the user specified the value on the command line. This can be useful to determine if the value of the argument was explicitly set by the user or set via the default value. You can only access the values stored in the pointers in the Action func, which is invoked after argument parsing has been completed. This precludes using the value of one argument as the default value of another. The -- operator marks the end of command line options. Everything that follows will be treated as an argument, even if starts with a dash. For example, the standard POSIX touch command, which takes a filename as an argument (and possibly other options that we'll ignore here), could be defined as: If we try to create a file named "-f" via our touch command: It will fail because the -f will be parsed as an option, not as an argument. The fix is to insert -- after all flags have been specified, so the remaining arguments are parsed as arguments instead of options as follows: This ensures the -f is parsed as an argument instead of a flag named f. This package supports nesting of commands and subcommands. Declare a top-level command by calling the Command func on the top-level App struct. For example, the following creates an application called docker that will have one command called run: The first argument is the name of the command the user will specify on the command line to invoke this command. The second argument is the description of the command shown in help messages. And, the last argument is a CmdInitializer, which is a function that receives a pointer to a Cmd struct representing the command. Within this function, define the options and arguments for the command by calling the same methods as you would with top-level App struct (BoolOpt, StringArg, ...). To execute code when the command is invoked, assign a function to the Action field of the Cmd struct. Within that function, you can safely refer to the options and arguments as command line parsing will be completed at the time the function is invoked: Optionally, to provide a more extensive description of the command, assign a string to LongDesc, which is displayed when a user invokes --help. A LongDesc can be provided for Cmds as well as the top-level App: Subcommands can be added by calling Command on the Cmd struct. They can by defined to any depth if needed: Command and subcommand aliases are also supported. To define one or more aliases, specify a space-separated list of strings to the first argument of Command: With the command structure defined above, users can invoke the app in a variety of ways: Commands can be hidden in the help messages. This can prove useful to deprecate a command so that it does not appear to new users in the help, but still exists to not break existing scripts. To hide a command, set the Hidden field to true: As a convenience, to assign an Action to a func with no arguments, use ActionCommand when defining the Command. For example, the following two statements are equivalent: Please note that options, arguments, specs, and long descriptions cannot be provided when using ActionCommand. This is intended for very simple command invocations that take no arguments. Finally, as a side-note, it may seem a bit weird that this package uses a function to initialize a command instead of simply returning a command struct. The motivation behind this API decision is scoping: as with the standard flag package, adding an option or an argument returns a pointer to a value which will be populated when the app is run. Since you'll want to store these pointers in variables, and to avoid having dozens of them in the same scope (the main func for example or as global variables), this API was specifically tailored to take a func parameter (called CmdInitializer), which accepts the command struct. With this design, the command's specific variables are limited in scope to this function. Interceptors, or hooks, can be defined to be executed before and after a command or when any of its subcommands are executed. For example, the following app defines multiple commands as well as a global flag which toggles verbosity: Instead of duplicating the check for the verbose flag and setting the debug level in every command (and its sub-commands), a Before interceptor can be set on the top-level App instead: Whenever a valid command is called by the user, all the Before interceptors defined on the app and the intermediate commands will be called, in order from the root to the leaf. Similarly, to execute a hook after a command has been called, e.g. to cleanup resources allocated in Before interceptors, simply set the After field of the App struct or any other Command. After interceptors will be called, in order, from the leaf up to the root (the opposite order of the Before interceptors). The following diagram shows when and in which order multiple Before and After interceptors are executed: To exit the application, use cli.Exit function, which accepts an exit code and exits the app with the provided code. It is important to use cli.Exit instead of os.Exit as the former ensures that all of the After interceptors are executed before exiting. An App or Command's invocation syntax can be customized using spec strings. This can be useful to indicate that an argument is optional or that two options are mutually exclusive. The spec string is one of the key differentiators between this package and other CLI packages as it allows the developer to express usage in a simple, familiar, yet concise grammar. To define option and argument usage for the top-level App, assign a spec string to the App's Spec field: Likewise, to define option and argument usage for a command or subcommand, assign a spec string to the Command's Spec field: The spec syntax is mostly based on the conventions used in POSIX command line applications (help messages and man pages). This syntax is described in full below. If a user invokes the app or command with the incorrect syntax, the app terminates with a help message showing the proper invocation. The remainder of this section describes the many features and capabilities of the spec string grammar. Options can use both short and long option names in spec strings. In the example below, the option is mandatory and must be provided. Any options referenced in a spec string MUST be explicitly declared, otherwise this package will panic. I.e. for each item in the spec string, a corresponding *Opt or *Arg is required: Arguments are specified with all-uppercased words. In the example below, both SRC and DST must be provided by the user (two arguments). Like options, any argument referenced in a spec string MUST be explicitly declared, otherwise this package will panic: With the exception of options, the order of the elements in a spec string is respected and enforced when command line arguments are parsed. In the example below, consecutive options (-f and -g) are parsed regardless of the order they are specified (both "-f=5 -g=6" and "-g=6 -f=5" are valid). Order between options and arguments is significant (-f and -g must appear before the SRC argument). The same holds true for arguments, where SRC must appear before DST: Optionality of options and arguments is specified in a spec string by enclosing the item in square brackets []. If the user does not provide an optional value, the app will use the default value specified when the argument was defined. In the example below, if -x is not provided, heapSize will default to 1024: Choice between two or more items is specified in a spec string by separating each choice with the | operator. Choices are mutually exclusive. In the examples below, only a single choice can be provided by the user otherwise the app will terminate displaying a help message on proper usage: Repetition of options and arguments is specified in a spec string with the ... postfix operator to mark an item as repeatable. Both options and arguments support repitition. In the example below, users may invoke the command with multiple -e options and multiple SRC arguments: Grouping of options and arguments is specified in a spec string with parenthesis. When combined with the choice | and repetition ... operators, complex syntaxes can be created. The parenthesis in the example below indicate a repeatable sequence of a -e option followed by an argument, and that is mutually exclusive to a choice between -x and -y options. Option groups, or option folding, are a shorthand method to declaring a choice between multiple options. I.e. any combination of the listed options in any order with at least one option selected. The following two statements are equivalent: Option groups are typically used in conjunction with optionality [] operators. I.e. any combination of the listed options in any order or none at all. The following two statements are equivalent: All of the options can be specified using a special syntax: [OPTIONS]. This is a special token in the spec string (not optionality and not an argument called OPTIONS). It is equivalent to an optional repeatable choice between all the available options. For example, if an app or a command declares 4 options a, b, c and d, then the following two statements are equivalent: Inline option values are specified in the spec string with the =<some-text> notation immediately following an option (long or short form) to provide users with an inline description or value. The actual inline values are ignored by the spec parser as they exist only to provide a contextual hint to the user. In the example below, "absolute-path" and "in seconds" are ignored by the parser: The -- operator can be used to automatically treat everything following it as arguments. In other words, placing a -- in the spec string automatically inserts a -- in the same position in the program call arguments. This lets you write programs such as the POSIX time utility for example: Below is the full EBNF grammar for the Specs language: By combining a few of these building blocks together (while respecting the grammar above), powerful and sophisticated validation constraints can be created in a simple and concise manner without having to define in code. This is one of the key differentiators between this package and other CLI packages. Validation of usage is handled entirely by the package through the spec string. Behind the scenes, this package parses the spec string and constructs a finite state machine used to parse the command line arguments. It also handles backtracking, which allows it to handle tricky cases, or what I like to call "the cp test": Without backtracking, this deceptively simple spec string cannot be parsed correctly. For instance, docopt can't handle this case, whereas this package does. By default an auto-generated spec string is created for the app and every command unless a spec string has been set by the user. This can simplify use of the package even further for simple syntaxes. The following logic is used to create an auto-generated spec string: 1) start with an empty spec string, 2) if at least one option was declared, append "[OPTIONS]" to the spec string, and 3) for each declared argument, append it, in the order of declaration, to the spec string. For example, given this command declaration: The auto-generated spec string, which should suffice for simple cases, would be: If additional constraints are required, the spec string must be set explicitly using the grammar documented above. By default, the following types are supported for options and arguments: bool, string, int, float64, strings (slice of strings), ints (slice of ints) and floats64 (slice of float64). You can, however, extend this package to handle other types, e.g. time.Duration, float64, or even your own struct types. To define your own custom type, you must implement the flag.Value interface for your custom type, and then declare the option or argument using VarOpt or VarArg respectively if using the short-form methods. If using the long-form struct, then use Var instead. The following example defines a custom type for a duration. It defines a duration argument that users will be able to invoke with strings in the form of "1h31m42s": To make a custom type to behave as a boolean option, i.e. doesn't take a value, it must implement the IsBoolFlag method that returns true: To make a custom type behave as a multi-valued option or argument, i.e. takes multiple values, it must implement the Clear method, which is called whenever the values list needs to be cleared, e.g. when the value was initially populated from an environment variable, and then explicitly set from the CLI: To hide the default value of a custom type, it must implement the IsDefault method that returns a boolean. The help message generator will use the return value to decide whether or not to display the default value to users:

Package gosnowflake is a pure Go Snowflake driver for the database/sql package. Clients can use the database/sql package directly. For example: Use the Open() function to create a database handle with connection parameters: The Go Snowflake Driver supports the following connection syntaxes (or data source name (DSN) formats): where all parameters must be escaped or use Config and DSN to construct a DSN string. For information about account identifiers, see the Snowflake documentation (https://docs.snowflake.com/en/user-guide/admin-account-identifier.html). The following example opens a database handle with the Snowflake account named "my_account" under the organization named "my_organization", where the username is "jsmith", password is "mypassword", database is "mydb", schema is "testschema", and warehouse is "mywh": The connection string (DSN) can contain both connection parameters (described below) and session parameters (https://docs.snowflake.com/en/sql-reference/parameters.html). The following connection parameters are supported: account <string>: Specifies your Snowflake account, where "<string>" is the account identifier assigned to your account by Snowflake. For information about account identifiers, see the Snowflake documentation (https://docs.snowflake.com/en/user-guide/admin-account-identifier.html). If you are using a global URL, then append the connection group and ".global" (e.g. "<account_identifier>-<connection_group>.global"). The account identifier and the connection group are separated by a dash ("-"), as shown above. This parameter is optional if your account identifier is specified after the "@" character in the connection string. region <string>: DEPRECATED. You may specify a region, such as "eu-central-1", with this parameter. However, since this parameter is deprecated, it is best to specify the region as part of the account parameter. For details, see the description of the account parameter. database: Specifies the database to use by default in the client session (can be changed after login). schema: Specifies the database schema to use by default in the client session (can be changed after login). warehouse: Specifies the virtual warehouse to use by default for queries, loading, etc. in the client session (can be changed after login). role: Specifies the role to use by default for accessing Snowflake objects in the client session (can be changed after login). passcode: Specifies the passcode provided by Duo when using multi-factor authentication (MFA) for login. passcodeInPassword: false by default. Set to true if the MFA passcode is embedded in the login password. Appends the MFA passcode to the end of the password. loginTimeout: Specifies the timeout, in seconds, for login. The default is 60 seconds. The login request gives up after the timeout length if the HTTP response is success. requestTimeout: Specifies the timeout, in seconds, for a query to complete. 0 (zero) specifies that the driver should wait indefinitely. The default is 0 seconds. The query request gives up after the timeout length if the HTTP response is success. authenticator: Specifies the authenticator to use for authenticating user credentials: To use the internal Snowflake authenticator, specify snowflake (Default). If you want to cache your MFA logins, use AuthTypeUsernamePasswordMFA authenticator. To authenticate through Okta, specify https://<okta_account_name>.okta.com (URL prefix for Okta). To authenticate using your IDP via a browser, specify externalbrowser. To authenticate via OAuth, specify oauth and provide an OAuth Access Token (see the token parameter below). application: Identifies your application to Snowflake Support. insecureMode: false by default. Set to true to bypass the Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) certificate revocation check. IMPORTANT: Change the default value for testing or emergency situations only. token: a token that can be used to authenticate. Should be used in conjunction with the "oauth" authenticator. client_session_keep_alive: Set to true have a heartbeat in the background every hour to keep the connection alive such that the connection session will never expire. Care should be taken in using this option as it opens up the access forever as long as the process is alive. ocspFailOpen: true by default. Set to false to make OCSP check fail closed mode. validateDefaultParameters: true by default. Set to false to disable checks on existence and privileges check for Database, Schema, Warehouse and Role when setting up the connection tracing: Specifies the logging level to be used. Set to error by default. Valid values are trace, debug, info, print, warning, error, fatal, panic. disableQueryContextCache: disables parsing of query context returned from server and resending it to server as well. Default value is false. clientConfigFile: specifies the location of the client configuration json file. In this file you can configure Easy Logging feature. disableSamlURLCheck: disables the SAML URL check. Default value is false. All other parameters are interpreted as session parameters (https://docs.snowflake.com/en/sql-reference/parameters.html). For example, the TIMESTAMP_OUTPUT_FORMAT session parameter can be set by adding: A complete connection string looks similar to the following: Session-level parameters can also be set by using the SQL command "ALTER SESSION" (https://docs.snowflake.com/en/sql-reference/sql/alter-session.html). Alternatively, use OpenWithConfig() function to create a database handle with the specified Config. # Connection Config You can also connect to your warehouse using the connection config. The dbSql library states that when you want to take advantage of driver-specific connection features that aren’t available in a connection string. Each driver supports its own set of connection properties, often providing ways to customize the connection request specific to the DBMS For example: If you are using this method, you dont need to pass a driver name to specify the driver type in which you are looking to connect. Since the driver name is not needed, you can optionally bypass driver registration on startup. To do this, set `GOSNOWFLAKE_SKIP_REGISTERATION` in your environment. This is useful you wish to register multiple verions of the driver. Note: GOSNOWFLAKE_SKIP_REGISTERATION should not be used if sql.Open() is used as the method to connect to the server, as sql.Open will require registration so it can map the driver name to the driver type, which in this case is "snowflake" and SnowflakeDriver{}. You can load the connnection configuration with .toml file format. With two environment variables SNOWFLAKE_HOME(connections.toml file directory) SNOWFLAKE_DEFAULT_CONNECTION_NAME(DSN name), the driver will search the config file and load the connection. You can find how to use this connection way at ./cmd/tomlfileconnection or Snowflake doc: https://docs.snowflake.com/en/developer-guide/snowflake-cli-v2/connecting/specify-credentials The Go Snowflake Driver honors the environment variables HTTP_PROXY, HTTPS_PROXY and NO_PROXY for the forward proxy setting. NO_PROXY specifies which hostname endings should be allowed to bypass the proxy server, e.g. no_proxy=.amazonaws.com means that Amazon S3 access does not need to go through the proxy. NO_PROXY does not support wildcards. Each value specified should be one of the following: The end of a hostname (or a complete hostname), for example: ".amazonaws.com" or "xy12345.snowflakecomputing.com". An IP address, for example "192.196.1.15". If more than one value is specified, values should be separated by commas, for example: By default, the driver's builtin logger is exposing logrus's FieldLogger and default at INFO level. Users can use SetLogger in driver.go to set a customized logger for gosnowflake package. In order to enable debug logging for the driver, user could use SetLogLevel("debug") in SFLogger interface as shown in demo code at cmd/logger.go. To redirect the logs SFlogger.SetOutput method could do the work. A custom query tag can be set in the context. Each query run with this context will include the custom query tag as metadata that will appear in the Query Tag column in the Query History log. For example: A specific query request ID can be set in the context and will be passed through in place of the default randomized request ID. For example: If you need query ID for your query you have to use raw connection. For queries: ``` ``` For execs: ``` ``` The result of your query can be retrieved by setting the query ID in the WithFetchResultByID context. ``` ``` From 0.5.0, a signal handling responsibility has moved to the applications. If you want to cancel a query/command by Ctrl+C, add a os.Interrupt trap in context to execute methods that can take the context parameter (e.g. QueryContext, ExecContext). See cmd/selectmany.go for the full example. The Go Snowflake Driver now supports the Arrow data format for data transfers between Snowflake and the Golang client. The Arrow data format avoids extra conversions between binary and textual representations of the data. The Arrow data format can improve performance and reduce memory consumption in clients. Snowflake continues to support the JSON data format. The data format is controlled by the session-level parameter GO_QUERY_RESULT_FORMAT. To use JSON format, execute: The valid values for the parameter are: If the user attempts to set the parameter to an invalid value, an error is returned. The parameter name and the parameter value are case-insensitive. This parameter can be set only at the session level. Usage notes: The Arrow data format reduces rounding errors in floating point numbers. You might see slightly different values for floating point numbers when using Arrow format than when using JSON format. In order to take advantage of the increased precision, you must pass in the context.Context object provided by the WithHigherPrecision function when querying. Traditionally, the rows.Scan() method returned a string when a variable of types interface was passed in. Turning on the flag ENABLE_HIGHER_PRECISION via WithHigherPrecision will return the natural, expected data type as well. For some numeric data types, the driver can retrieve larger values when using the Arrow format than when using the JSON format. For example, using Arrow format allows the full range of SQL NUMERIC(38,0) values to be retrieved, while using JSON format allows only values in the range supported by the Golang int64 data type. Users should ensure that Golang variables are declared using the appropriate data type for the full range of values contained in the column. For an example, see below. When using the Arrow format, the driver supports more Golang data types and more ways to convert SQL values to those Golang data types. The table below lists the supported Snowflake SQL data types and the corresponding Golang data types. The columns are: The SQL data type. The default Golang data type that is returned when you use snowflakeRows.Scan() to read data from Arrow data format via an interface{}. The possible Golang data types that can be returned when you use snowflakeRows.Scan() to read data from Arrow data format directly. The default Golang data type that is returned when you use snowflakeRows.Scan() to read data from JSON data format via an interface{}. (All returned values are strings.) The standard Golang data type that is returned when you use snowflakeRows.Scan() to read data from JSON data format directly. Go Data Types for Scan() =================================================================================================================== | ARROW | JSON =================================================================================================================== SQL Data Type | Default Go Data Type | Supported Go Data | Default Go Data Type | Supported Go Data | for Scan() interface{} | Types for Scan() | for Scan() interface{} | Types for Scan() =================================================================================================================== BOOLEAN | bool | string | bool ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- VARCHAR | string | string ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- DOUBLE | float32, float64 [1] , [2] | string | float32, float64 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- INTEGER that | int, int8, int16, int32, int64 | string | int, int8, int16, fits in int64 | [1] , [2] | | int32, int64 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- INTEGER that doesn't | int, int8, int16, int32, int64, *big.Int | string | error fit in int64 | [1] , [2] , [3] , [4] | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- NUMBER(P, S) | float32, float64, *big.Float | string | float32, float64 where S > 0 | [1] , [2] , [3] , [5] | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- DATE | time.Time | string | time.Time ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- TIME | time.Time | string | time.Time ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- TIMESTAMP_LTZ | time.Time | string | time.Time ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- TIMESTAMP_NTZ | time.Time | string | time.Time ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- TIMESTAMP_TZ | time.Time | string | time.Time ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- BINARY | []byte | string | []byte ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ARRAY [6] | string / array | string / array ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OBJECT [6] | string / struct | string / struct ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- VARIANT | string | string ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- MAP | map | map [1] Converting from a higher precision data type to a lower precision data type via the snowflakeRows.Scan() method can lose low bits (lose precision), lose high bits (completely change the value), or result in error. [2] Attempting to convert from a higher precision data type to a lower precision data type via interface{} causes an error. [3] Higher precision data types like *big.Int and *big.Float can be accessed by querying with a context returned by WithHigherPrecision(). [4] You cannot directly Scan() into the alternative data types via snowflakeRows.Scan(), but can convert to those data types by using .Int64()/.String()/.Uint64() methods. For an example, see below. [5] You cannot directly Scan() into the alternative data types via snowflakeRows.Scan(), but can convert to those data types by using .Float32()/.String()/.Float64() methods. For an example, see below. [6] Arrays and objects can be either semistructured or structured, see more info in section below. Note: SQL NULL values are converted to Golang nil values, and vice-versa. Snowflake supports two flavours of "structured data" - semistructured and structured. Semistructured types are variants, objects and arrays without schema. When data is fetched, it's represented as strings and the client is responsible for its interpretation. Example table definition: The data not have any corresponding schema, so values in table may be slightly different. Semistuctured variants, objects and arrays are always represented as strings for scanning: When inserting, a marker indicating correct type must be used, for example: Structured types differentiate from semistructured types by having specific schema. In all rows of the table, values must conform to this schema. Example table definition: To retrieve structured objects, follow these steps: 1. Create a struct implementing sql.Scanner interface, example: a) b) Automatic scan goes through all fields in a struct and read object fields. Struct fields have to be public. Embedded structs have to be pointers. Matching name is built using struct field name with first letter lowercase. Additionally, `sf` tag can be added: - first value is always a name of a field in an SQL object - additionally `ignore` parameter can be passed to omit this field 2. Use WithStructuredTypesEnabled context while querying data. 3. Use it in regular scan: See StructuredObject for all available operations including null support, embedding nested structs, etc. Retrieving array of simple types works exactly the same like normal values - using Scan function. You can use WithMapValuesNullable and WithArrayValuesNullable contexts to handle null values in, respectively, maps and arrays of simple types in the database. In that case, sql null types will be used: If you want to scan array of structs, you have to use a helper function ScanArrayOfScanners: Retrieving structured maps is very similar to retrieving arrays: To bind structured objects use: 1. Create a type which implements a StructuredObjectWriter interface, example: a) b) 2. Use an instance as regular bind. 3. If you need to bind nil value, use special syntax: Binding structured arrays are like any other parameter. The only difference is - if you want to insert empty array (not nil but empty), you have to use: The following example shows how to retrieve very large values using the math/big package. This example retrieves a large INTEGER value to an interface and then extracts a big.Int value from that interface. If the value fits into an int64, then the code also copies the value to a variable of type int64. Note that a context that enables higher precision must be passed in with the query. If the variable named "rows" is known to contain a big.Int, then you can use the following instead of scanning into an interface and then converting to a big.Int: If the variable named "rows" contains a big.Int, then each of the following fails: Similar code and rules also apply to big.Float values. If you are not sure what data type will be returned, you can use code similar to the following to check the data type of the returned value: You can retrieve data in a columnar format similar to the format a server returns, without transposing them to rows. When working with the arrow columnar format in go driver, ArrowBatch structs are used. These are structs mostly corresponding to data chunks received from the backend. They allow for access to specific arrow.Record structs. An ArrowBatch can exist in a state where the underlying data has not yet been loaded. The data is downloaded and translated only on demand. Translation options are retrieved from a context.Context interface, which is either passed from query context or set by the user using WithContext(ctx) method. In order to access them you must use `WithArrowBatches` context, similar to the following: This returns []*ArrowBatch. ArrowBatch functions: GetRowCount(): Returns the number of rows in the ArrowBatch. Note that this returns 0 if the data has not yet been loaded, irrespective of it’s actual size. WithContext(ctx context.Context): Sets the context of the ArrowBatch to the one provided. Note that the context will not retroactively apply to data that has already been downloaded. For example: will produce the same result in records1 and records2, irrespective of the newly provided ctx. Context worth noting are: -WithArrowBatchesTimestampOption -WithHigherPrecision -WithArrowBatchesUtf8Validation described in more detail later. Fetch(): Returns the underlying records as *[]arrow.Record. When this function is called, the ArrowBatch checks whether the underlying data has already been loaded, and downloads it if not. Limitations: How to handle timestamps in Arrow batches: Snowflake returns timestamps natively (from backend to driver) in multiple formats. The Arrow timestamp is an 8-byte data type, which is insufficient to handle the larger date and time ranges used by Snowflake. Also, Snowflake supports 0-9 (nanosecond) digit precision for seconds, while Arrow supports only 3 (millisecond), 6 (microsecond), an 9 (nanosecond) precision. Consequently, Snowflake uses a custom timestamp format in Arrow, which differs on timestamp type and precision. If you want to use timestamps in Arrow batches, you have two options: How to handle invalid UTF-8 characters in Arrow batches: Snowflake previously allowed users to upload data with invalid UTF-8 characters. Consequently, Arrow records containing string columns in Snowflake could include these invalid UTF-8 characters. However, according to the Arrow specifications (https://arrow.apache.org/docs/cpp/api/datatype.html and https://github.com/apache/arrow/blob/a03d957b5b8d0425f9d5b6c98b6ee1efa56a1248/go/arrow/datatype.go#L73-L74), Arrow string columns should only contain UTF-8 characters. To address this issue and prevent potential downstream disruptions, the context WithArrowBatchesUtf8Validation, is introduced. When enabled, this feature iterates through all values in string columns, identifying and replacing any invalid characters with `�`. This ensures that Arrow records conform to the UTF-8 standards, preventing validation failures in downstream services like the Rust Arrow library that impose strict validation checks. How to handle higher precision in Arrow batches: To preserve BigDecimal values within Arrow batches, use WithHigherPrecision. This offers two main benefits: it helps avoid precision loss and defers the conversion to upstream services. Alternatively, without this setting, all non-zero scale numbers will be converted to float64, potentially resulting in loss of precision. Zero-scale numbers (DECIMAL256, DECIMAL128) will be converted to int64, which could lead to overflow. Binding allows a SQL statement to use a value that is stored in a Golang variable. Without binding, a SQL statement specifies values by specifying literals inside the statement. For example, the following statement uses the literal value “42“ in an UPDATE statement: With binding, you can execute a SQL statement that uses a value that is inside a variable. For example: The “?“ inside the “VALUES“ clause specifies that the SQL statement uses the value from a variable. Binding data that involves time zones can require special handling. For details, see the section titled "Timestamps with Time Zones". Version 1.6.23 (and later) of the driver takes advantage of sql.Null types which enables the proper handling of null parameters inside function calls, i.e.: The timestamp nullability had to be achieved by wrapping the sql.NullTime type as the Snowflake provides several date and time types which are mapped to single Go time.Time type: Version 1.3.9 (and later) of the Go Snowflake Driver supports the ability to bind an array variable to a parameter in a SQL INSERT statement. You can use this technique to insert multiple rows in a single batch. As an example, the following code inserts rows into a table that contains integer, float, boolean, and string columns. The example binds arrays to the parameters in the INSERT statement. If the array contains SQL NULL values, use slice []interface{}, which allows Golang nil values. This feature is available in version 1.6.12 (and later) of the driver. For example, For slices []interface{} containing time.Time values, a binding parameter flag is required for the preceding array variable in the Array() function. This feature is available in version 1.6.13 (and later) of the driver. For example, Note: For alternative ways to load data into the Snowflake database (including bulk loading using the COPY command), see Loading Data into Snowflake (https://docs.snowflake.com/en/user-guide-data-load.html). When you use array binding to insert a large number of values, the driver can improve performance by streaming the data (without creating files on the local machine) to a temporary stage for ingestion. The driver automatically does this when the number of values exceeds a threshold (no changes are needed to user code). In order for the driver to send the data to a temporary stage, the user must have the following privilege on the schema: If the user does not have this privilege, the driver falls back to sending the data with the query to the Snowflake database. In addition, the current database and schema for the session must be set. If these are not set, the CREATE TEMPORARY STAGE command executed by the driver can fail with the following error: For alternative ways to load data into the Snowflake database (including bulk loading using the COPY command), see Loading Data into Snowflake (https://docs.snowflake.com/en/user-guide-data-load.html). Go's database/sql package supports the ability to bind a parameter in a SQL statement to a time.Time variable. However, when the client binds data to send to the server, the driver cannot determine the correct Snowflake date/timestamp data type to associate with the binding parameter. For example: To resolve this issue, a binding parameter flag is introduced that associates any subsequent time.Time type to the DATE, TIME, TIMESTAMP_LTZ, TIMESTAMP_NTZ or BINARY data type. The above example could be rewritten as follows: The driver fetches TIMESTAMP_TZ (timestamp with time zone) data using the offset-based Location types, which represent a collection of time offsets in use in a geographical area, such as CET (Central European Time) or UTC (Coordinated Universal Time). The offset-based Location data is generated and cached when a Go Snowflake Driver application starts, and if the given offset is not in the cache, it is generated dynamically. Currently, Snowflake does not support the name-based Location types (e.g. "America/Los_Angeles"). For more information about Location types, see the Go documentation for https://golang.org/pkg/time/#Location. Internally, this feature leverages the []byte data type. As a result, BINARY data cannot be bound without the binding parameter flag. In the following example, sf is an alias for the gosnowflake package: The driver directly downloads a result set from the cloud storage if the size is large. It is required to shift workloads from the Snowflake database to the clients for scale. The download takes place by goroutine named "Chunk Downloader" asynchronously so that the driver can fetch the next result set while the application can consume the current result set. The application may change the number of result set chunk downloader if required. Note this does not help reduce memory footprint by itself. Consider Custom JSON Decoder. Custom JSON Decoder for Parsing Result Set (Experimental) The application may have the driver use a custom JSON decoder that incrementally parses the result set as follows. This option will reduce the memory footprint to half or even quarter, but it can significantly degrade the performance depending on the environment. The test cases running on Travis Ubuntu box show five times less memory footprint while four times slower. Be cautious when using the option. The Go Snowflake Driver supports JWT (JSON Web Token) authentication. To enable this feature, construct the DSN with fields "authenticator=SNOWFLAKE_JWT&privateKey=<your_private_key>", or using a Config structure specifying: The <your_private_key> should be a base64 URL encoded PKCS8 rsa private key string. One way to encode a byte slice to URL base 64 URL format is through the base64.URLEncoding.EncodeToString() function. On the server side, you can alter the public key with the SQL command: The <your_public_key> should be a base64 Standard encoded PKI public key string. One way to encode a byte slice to base 64 Standard format is through the base64.StdEncoding.EncodeToString() function. To generate the valid key pair, you can execute the following commands in the shell: Note: As of February 2020, Golang's official library does not support passcode-encrypted PKCS8 private key. For security purposes, Snowflake highly recommends that you store the passcode-encrypted private key on the disk and decrypt the key in your application using a library you trust. JWT tokens are recreated on each retry and they are valid (`exp` claim) for `jwtTimeout` seconds. Each retry timeout is configured by `jwtClientTimeout`. Retries are limited by total time of `loginTimeout`. The driver allows to authenticate using the external browser. When a connection is created, the driver will open the browser window and ask the user to sign in. To enable this feature, construct the DSN with field "authenticator=EXTERNALBROWSER" or using a Config structure with following Authenticator specified: The external browser authentication implements timeout mechanism. This prevents the driver from hanging interminably when browser window was closed, or not responding. Timeout defaults to 120s and can be changed through setting DSN field "externalBrowserTimeout=240" (time in seconds) or using a Config structure with following ExternalBrowserTimeout specified: This feature is available in version 1.3.8 or later of the driver. By default, Snowflake returns an error for queries issued with multiple statements. This restriction helps protect against SQL Injection attacks (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/SQL_injection). The multi-statement feature allows users skip this restriction and execute multiple SQL statements through a single Golang function call. However, this opens up the possibility for SQL injection, so it should be used carefully. The risk can be reduced by specifying the exact number of statements to be executed, which makes it more difficult to inject a statement by appending it. More details are below. The Go Snowflake Driver provides two functions that can execute multiple SQL statements in a single call: To compose a multi-statement query, simply create a string that contains all the queries, separated by semicolons, in the order in which the statements should be executed. To protect against SQL Injection attacks while using the multi-statement feature, pass a Context that specifies the number of statements in the string. For example: When multiple queries are executed by a single call to QueryContext(), multiple result sets are returned. After you process the first result set, get the next result set (for the next SQL statement) by calling NextResultSet(). The following pseudo-code shows how to process multiple result sets: The function db.ExecContext() returns a single result, which is the sum of the number of rows changed by each individual statement. For example, if your multi-statement query executed two UPDATE statements, each of which updated 10 rows, then the result returned would be 20. Individual row counts for individual statements are not available. The following code shows how to retrieve the result of a multi-statement query executed through db.ExecContext(): Note: Because a multi-statement ExecContext() returns a single value, you cannot detect offsetting errors. For example, suppose you expected the return value to be 20 because you expected each UPDATE statement to update 10 rows. If one UPDATE statement updated 15 rows and the other UPDATE statement updated only 5 rows, the total would still be 20. You would see no indication that the UPDATES had not functioned as expected. The ExecContext() function does not return an error if passed a query (e.g. a SELECT statement). However, it still returns only a single value, not a result set, so using it to execute queries (or a mix of queries and non-query statements) is impractical. The QueryContext() function does not return an error if passed non-query statements (e.g. DML). The function returns a result set for each statement, whether or not the statement is a query. For each non-query statement, the result set contains a single row that contains a single column; the value is the number of rows changed by the statement. If you want to execute a mix of query and non-query statements (e.g. a mix of SELECT and DML statements) in a multi-statement query, use QueryContext(). You can retrieve the result sets for the queries, and you can retrieve or ignore the row counts for the non-query statements. Note: PUT statements are not supported for multi-statement queries. If a SQL statement passed to ExecQuery() or QueryContext() fails to compile or execute, that statement is aborted, and subsequent statements are not executed. Any statements prior to the aborted statement are unaffected. For example, if the statements below are run as one multi-statement query, the multi-statement query fails on the third statement, and an exception is thrown. If you then query the contents of the table named "test", the values 1 and 2 would be present. When using the QueryContext() and ExecContext() functions, golang code can check for errors the usual way. For example: Preparing statements and using bind variables are also not supported for multi-statement queries. The Go Snowflake Driver supports asynchronous execution of SQL statements. Asynchronous execution allows you to start executing a statement and then retrieve the result later without being blocked while waiting. While waiting for the result of a SQL statement, you can perform other tasks, including executing other SQL statements. Most of the steps to execute an asynchronous query are the same as the steps to execute a synchronous query. However, there is an additional step, which is that you must call the WithAsyncMode() function to update your Context object to specify that asynchronous mode is enabled. In the code below, the call to "WithAsyncMode()" is specific to asynchronous mode. The rest of the code is compatible with both asynchronous mode and synchronous mode. The function db.QueryContext() returns an object of type snowflakeRows regardless of whether the query is synchronous or asynchronous. However: The call to the Next() function of snowflakeRows is always synchronous (i.e. blocking). If the query has not yet completed and the snowflakeRows object (named "rows" in this example) has not been filled in yet, then rows.Next() waits until the result set has been filled in. More generally, calls to any Golang SQL API function implemented in snowflakeRows or snowflakeResult are blocking calls, and wait if results are not yet available. (Examples of other synchronous calls include: snowflakeRows.Err(), snowflakeRows.Columns(), snowflakeRows.columnTypes(), snowflakeRows.Scan(), and snowflakeResult.RowsAffected().) Because the example code above executes only one query and no other activity, there is no significant difference in behavior between asynchronous and synchronous behavior. The differences become significant if, for example, you want to perform some other activity after the query starts and before it completes. The example code below starts a query, which run in the background, and then retrieves the results later. This example uses small SELECT statements that do not retrieve enough data to require asynchronous handling. However, the technique works for larger data sets, and for situations where the programmer might want to do other work after starting the queries and before retrieving the results. For a more elaborative example please see cmd/async/async.go The Go Snowflake Driver supports the PUT and GET commands. The PUT command copies a file from a local computer (the computer where the Golang client is running) to a stage on the cloud platform. The GET command copies data files from a stage on the cloud platform to a local computer. See the following for information on the syntax and supported parameters: Using PUT: The following example shows how to run a PUT command by passing a string to the db.Query() function: "<local_file>" should include the file path as well as the name. Snowflake recommends using an absolute path rather than a relative path. For example: Different client platforms (e.g. linux, Windows) have different path name conventions. Ensure that you specify path names appropriately. This is particularly important on Windows, which uses the backslash character as both an escape character and as a separator in path names. To send information from a stream (rather than a file) use code similar to the code below. (The ReplaceAll() function is needed on Windows to handle backslashes in the path to the file.) Note: PUT statements are not supported for multi-statement queries. Using GET: The following example shows how to run a GET command by passing a string to the db.Query() function: "<local_file>" should include the file path as well as the name. Snowflake recommends using an absolute path rather than a relative path. For example: To download a file into an in-memory stream (rather than a file) use code similar to the code below. Note: GET statements are not supported for multi-statement queries. Specifying temporary directory for encryption and compression: Putting and getting requires compression and/or encryption, which is done in the OS temporary directory. If you cannot use default temporary directory for your OS or you want to specify it yourself, you can use "tmpDirPath" DSN parameter. Remember, to encode slashes. Example: Using custom configuration for PUT/GET: If you want to override some default configuration options, you can use `WithFileTransferOptions` context. There are multiple config parameters including progress bars or compression.

Package gofpdf implements a PDF document generator with high level support for text, drawing and images. - UTF-8 support - Choice of measurement unit, page format and margins - Page header and footer management - Automatic page breaks, line breaks, and text justification - Inclusion of JPEG, PNG, GIF, TIFF and basic path-only SVG images - Colors, gradients and alpha channel transparency - Outline bookmarks - Internal and external links - TrueType, Type1 and encoding support - Page compression - Lines, Bézier curves, arcs, and ellipses - Rotation, scaling, skewing, translation, and mirroring - Clipping - Document protection - Layers - Templates - Barcodes - Charting facility - Import PDFs as templates gofpdf has no dependencies other than the Go standard library. All tests pass on Linux, Mac and Windows platforms. gofpdf supports UTF-8 TrueType fonts and “right-to-left” languages. Note that Chinese, Japanese, and Korean characters may not be included in many general purpose fonts. For these languages, a specialized font (for example, NotoSansSC for simplified Chinese) can be used. Also, support is provided to automatically translate UTF-8 runes to code page encodings for languages that have fewer than 256 glyphs. This repository will not be maintained, at least for some unknown duration. But it is hoped that gofpdf has a bright future in the open source world. Due to Go’s promise of compatibility, gofpdf should continue to function without modification for a longer time than would be the case with many other languages. Forks should be based on the last viable commit. Tools such as active-forks can be used to select a fork that looks promising for your needs. If a particular fork looks like it has taken the lead in attracting followers, this README will be updated to point people in that direction. The efforts of all contributors to this project have been deeply appreciated. Best wishes to all of you. If you currently use the $GOPATH scheme, install the package with the following command. To test the installation, run The following Go code generates a simple PDF file. See the functions in the fpdf_test.go file (shown as examples in this documentation) for more advanced PDF examples. If an error occurs in an Fpdf method, an internal error field is set. After this occurs, Fpdf method calls typically return without performing any operations and the error state is retained. This error management scheme facilitates PDF generation since individual method calls do not need to be examined for failure; it is generally sufficient to wait until after Output() is called. For the same reason, if an error occurs in the calling application during PDF generation, it may be desirable for the application to transfer the error to the Fpdf instance by calling the SetError() method or the SetErrorf() method. At any time during the life cycle of the Fpdf instance, the error state can be determined with a call to Ok() or Err(). The error itself can be retrieved with a call to Error(). This package is a relatively straightforward translation from the original FPDF library written in PHP (despite the caveat in the introduction to Effective Go). The API names have been retained even though the Go idiom would suggest otherwise (for example, pdf.GetX() is used rather than simply pdf.X()). The similarity of the two libraries makes the original FPDF website a good source of information. It includes a forum and FAQ. However, some internal changes have been made. Page content is built up using buffers (of type bytes.Buffer) rather than repeated string concatenation. Errors are handled as explained above rather than panicking. Output is generated through an interface of type io.Writer or io.WriteCloser. A number of the original PHP methods behave differently based on the type of the arguments that are passed to them; in these cases additional methods have been exported to provide similar functionality. Font definition files are produced in JSON rather than PHP. A side effect of running go test ./... is the production of a number of example PDFs. These can be found in the gofpdf/pdf directory after the tests complete. Please note that these examples run in the context of a test. In order run an example as a standalone application, you’ll need to examine fpdf_test.go for some helper routines, for example exampleFilename() and summary(). Example PDFs can be compared with reference copies in order to verify that they have been generated as expected. This comparison will be performed if a PDF with the same name as the example PDF is placed in the gofpdf/pdf/reference directory and if the third argument to ComparePDFFiles() in internal/example/example.go is true. (By default it is false.) The routine that summarizes an example will look for this file and, if found, will call ComparePDFFiles() to check the example PDF for equality with its reference PDF. If differences exist between the two files they will be printed to standard output and the test will fail. If the reference file is missing, the comparison is considered to succeed. In order to successfully compare two PDFs, the placement of internal resources must be consistent and the internal creation timestamps must be the same. To do this, the methods SetCatalogSort() and SetCreationDate() need to be called for both files. This is done automatically for all examples. Nothing special is required to use the standard PDF fonts (courier, helvetica, times, zapfdingbats) in your documents other than calling SetFont(). You should use AddUTF8Font() or AddUTF8FontFromBytes() to add a TrueType UTF-8 encoded font. Use RTL() and LTR() methods switch between “right-to-left” and “left-to-right” mode. In order to use a different non-UTF-8 TrueType or Type1 font, you will need to generate a font definition file and, if the font will be embedded into PDFs, a compressed version of the font file. This is done by calling the MakeFont function or using the included makefont command line utility. To create the utility, cd into the makefont subdirectory and run “go build”. This will produce a standalone executable named makefont. Select the appropriate encoding file from the font subdirectory and run the command as in the following example. In your PDF generation code, call AddFont() to load the font and, as with the standard fonts, SetFont() to begin using it. Most examples, including the package example, demonstrate this method. Good sources of free, open-source fonts include Google Fonts and DejaVu Fonts. The draw2d package is a two dimensional vector graphics library that can generate output in different forms. It uses gofpdf for its document production mode. gofpdf is a global community effort and you are invited to make it even better. If you have implemented a new feature or corrected a problem, please consider contributing your change to the project. A contribution that does not directly pertain to the core functionality of gofpdf should be placed in its own directory directly beneath the contrib directory. Here are guidelines for making submissions. Your change should - be compatible with the MIT License - be properly documented - be formatted with go fmt - include an example in fpdf_test.go if appropriate - conform to the standards of golint and go vet, that is, golint . and go vet . should not generate any warnings - not diminish test coverage Pull requests are the preferred means of accepting your changes. gofpdf is released under the MIT License. It is copyrighted by Kurt Jung and the contributors acknowledged below. This package’s code and documentation are closely derived from the FPDF library created by Olivier Plathey, and a number of font and image resources are copied directly from it. Bruno Michel has provided valuable assistance with the code. Drawing support is adapted from the FPDF geometric figures script by David Hernández Sanz. Transparency support is adapted from the FPDF transparency script by Martin Hall-May. Support for gradients and clipping is adapted from FPDF scripts by Andreas Würmser. Support for outline bookmarks is adapted from Olivier Plathey by Manuel Cornes. Layer support is adapted from Olivier Plathey. Support for transformations is adapted from the FPDF transformation script by Moritz Wagner and Andreas Würmser. PDF protection is adapted from the work of Klemen Vodopivec for the FPDF product. Lawrence Kesteloot provided code to allow an image’s extent to be determined prior to placement. Support for vertical alignment within a cell was provided by Stefan Schroeder. Ivan Daniluk generalized the font and image loading code to use the Reader interface while maintaining backward compatibility. Anthony Starks provided code for the Polygon function. Robert Lillack provided the Beziergon function and corrected some naming issues with the internal curve function. Claudio Felber provided implementations for dashed line drawing and generalized font loading. Stani Michiels provided support for multi-segment path drawing with smooth line joins, line join styles, enhanced fill modes, and has helped greatly with package presentation and tests. Templating is adapted by Marcus Downing from the FPDF_Tpl library created by Jan Slabon and Setasign. Jelmer Snoeck contributed packages that generate a variety of barcodes and help with registering images on the web. Jelmer Snoek and Guillermo Pascual augmented the basic HTML functionality with aligned text. Kent Quirk implemented backwards-compatible support for reading DPI from images that support it, and for setting DPI manually and then having it properly taken into account when calculating image size. Paulo Coutinho provided support for static embedded fonts. Dan Meyers added support for embedded JavaScript. David Fish added a generic alias-replacement function to enable, among other things, table of contents functionality. Andy Bakun identified and corrected a problem in which the internal catalogs were not sorted stably. Paul Montag added encoding and decoding functionality for templates, including images that are embedded in templates; this allows templates to be stored independently of gofpdf. Paul also added support for page boxes used in printing PDF documents. Wojciech Matusiak added supported for word spacing. Artem Korotkiy added support of UTF-8 fonts. Dave Barnes added support for imported objects and templates. Brigham Thompson added support for rounded rectangles. Joe Westcott added underline functionality and optimized image storage. Benoit KUGLER contributed support for rectangles with corners of unequal radius, modification times, and for file attachments and annotations. - Remove all legacy code page font support; use UTF-8 exclusively - Improve test coverage as reported by the coverage tool. Example demonstrates the generation of a simple PDF document. Note that since only core fonts are used (in this case Arial, a synonym for Helvetica), an empty string can be specified for the font directory in the call to New(). Note also that the example.Filename() and example.Summary() functions belong to a separate, internal package and are not part of the gofpdf library. If an error occurs at some point during the construction of the document, subsequent method calls exit immediately and the error is finally retrieved with the output call where it can be handled by the application.

Package gofpdf implements a PDF document generator with high level support for text, drawing and images. - UTF-8 support - Choice of measurement unit, page format and margins - Page header and footer management - Automatic page breaks, line breaks, and text justification - Inclusion of JPEG, PNG, GIF, TIFF and basic path-only SVG images - Colors, gradients and alpha channel transparency - Outline bookmarks - Internal and external links - TrueType, Type1 and encoding support - Page compression - Lines, Bézier curves, arcs, and ellipses - Rotation, scaling, skewing, translation, and mirroring - Clipping - Document protection - Layers - Templates - Barcodes - Charting facility - Import PDFs as templates gofpdf has no dependencies other than the Go standard library. All tests pass on Linux, Mac and Windows platforms. gofpdf supports UTF-8 TrueType fonts and “right-to-left” languages. Note that Chinese, Japanese, and Korean characters may not be included in many general purpose fonts. For these languages, a specialized font (for example, NotoSansSC for simplified Chinese) can be used. Also, support is provided to automatically translate UTF-8 runes to code page encodings for languages that have fewer than 256 glyphs. This repository will not be maintained, at least for some unknown duration. But it is hoped that gofpdf has a bright future in the open source world. Due to Go’s promise of compatibility, gofpdf should continue to function without modification for a longer time than would be the case with many other languages. Forks should be based on the last viable commit. Tools such as active-forks can be used to select a fork that looks promising for your needs. If a particular fork looks like it has taken the lead in attracting followers, this README will be updated to point people in that direction. The efforts of all contributors to this project have been deeply appreciated. Best wishes to all of you. To install the package on your system, run Later, to receive updates, run The following Go code generates a simple PDF file. See the functions in the fpdf_test.go file (shown as examples in this documentation) for more advanced PDF examples. If an error occurs in an Fpdf method, an internal error field is set. After this occurs, Fpdf method calls typically return without performing any operations and the error state is retained. This error management scheme facilitates PDF generation since individual method calls do not need to be examined for failure; it is generally sufficient to wait until after Output() is called. For the same reason, if an error occurs in the calling application during PDF generation, it may be desirable for the application to transfer the error to the Fpdf instance by calling the SetError() method or the SetErrorf() method. At any time during the life cycle of the Fpdf instance, the error state can be determined with a call to Ok() or Err(). The error itself can be retrieved with a call to Error(). This package is a relatively straightforward translation from the original FPDF library written in PHP (despite the caveat in the introduction to Effective Go). The API names have been retained even though the Go idiom would suggest otherwise (for example, pdf.GetX() is used rather than simply pdf.X()). The similarity of the two libraries makes the original FPDF website a good source of information. It includes a forum and FAQ. However, some internal changes have been made. Page content is built up using buffers (of type bytes.Buffer) rather than repeated string concatenation. Errors are handled as explained above rather than panicking. Output is generated through an interface of type io.Writer or io.WriteCloser. A number of the original PHP methods behave differently based on the type of the arguments that are passed to them; in these cases additional methods have been exported to provide similar functionality. Font definition files are produced in JSON rather than PHP. A side effect of running go test ./... is the production of a number of example PDFs. These can be found in the gofpdf/pdf directory after the tests complete. Please note that these examples run in the context of a test. In order run an example as a standalone application, you’ll need to examine fpdf_test.go for some helper routines, for example exampleFilename() and summary(). Example PDFs can be compared with reference copies in order to verify that they have been generated as expected. This comparison will be performed if a PDF with the same name as the example PDF is placed in the gofpdf/pdf/reference directory and if the third argument to ComparePDFFiles() in internal/example/example.go is true. (By default it is false.) The routine that summarizes an example will look for this file and, if found, will call ComparePDFFiles() to check the example PDF for equality with its reference PDF. If differences exist between the two files they will be printed to standard output and the test will fail. If the reference file is missing, the comparison is considered to succeed. In order to successfully compare two PDFs, the placement of internal resources must be consistent and the internal creation timestamps must be the same. To do this, the methods SetCatalogSort() and SetCreationDate() need to be called for both files. This is done automatically for all examples. Nothing special is required to use the standard PDF fonts (courier, helvetica, times, zapfdingbats) in your documents other than calling SetFont(). You should use AddUTF8Font() or AddUTF8FontFromBytes() to add a TrueType UTF-8 encoded font. Use RTL() and LTR() methods switch between “right-to-left” and “left-to-right” mode. In order to use a different non-UTF-8 TrueType or Type1 font, you will need to generate a font definition file and, if the font will be embedded into PDFs, a compressed version of the font file. This is done by calling the MakeFont function or using the included makefont command line utility. To create the utility, cd into the makefont subdirectory and run “go build”. This will produce a standalone executable named makefont. Select the appropriate encoding file from the font subdirectory and run the command as in the following example. In your PDF generation code, call AddFont() to load the font and, as with the standard fonts, SetFont() to begin using it. Most examples, including the package example, demonstrate this method. Good sources of free, open-source fonts include Google Fonts and DejaVu Fonts. The draw2d package is a two dimensional vector graphics library that can generate output in different forms. It uses gofpdf for its document production mode. gofpdf is a global community effort and you are invited to make it even better. If you have implemented a new feature or corrected a problem, please consider contributing your change to the project. A contribution that does not directly pertain to the core functionality of gofpdf should be placed in its own directory directly beneath the contrib directory. Here are guidelines for making submissions. Your change should - be compatible with the MIT License - be properly documented - be formatted with go fmt - include an example in fpdf_test.go if appropriate - conform to the standards of golint and go vet, that is, golint . and go vet . should not generate any warnings - not diminish test coverage Pull requests are the preferred means of accepting your changes. gofpdf is released under the MIT License. It is copyrighted by Kurt Jung and the contributors acknowledged below. This package’s code and documentation are closely derived from the FPDF library created by Olivier Plathey, and a number of font and image resources are copied directly from it. Bruno Michel has provided valuable assistance with the code. Drawing support is adapted from the FPDF geometric figures script by David Hernández Sanz. Transparency support is adapted from the FPDF transparency script by Martin Hall-May. Support for gradients and clipping is adapted from FPDF scripts by Andreas Würmser. Support for outline bookmarks is adapted from Olivier Plathey by Manuel Cornes. Layer support is adapted from Olivier Plathey. Support for transformations is adapted from the FPDF transformation script by Moritz Wagner and Andreas Würmser. PDF protection is adapted from the work of Klemen Vodopivec for the FPDF product. Lawrence Kesteloot provided code to allow an image’s extent to be determined prior to placement. Support for vertical alignment within a cell was provided by Stefan Schroeder. Ivan Daniluk generalized the font and image loading code to use the Reader interface while maintaining backward compatibility. Anthony Starks provided code for the Polygon function. Robert Lillack provided the Beziergon function and corrected some naming issues with the internal curve function. Claudio Felber provided implementations for dashed line drawing and generalized font loading. Stani Michiels provided support for multi-segment path drawing with smooth line joins, line join styles, enhanced fill modes, and has helped greatly with package presentation and tests. Templating is adapted by Marcus Downing from the FPDF_Tpl library created by Jan Slabon and Setasign. Jelmer Snoeck contributed packages that generate a variety of barcodes and help with registering images on the web. Jelmer Snoek and Guillermo Pascual augmented the basic HTML functionality with aligned text. Kent Quirk implemented backwards-compatible support for reading DPI from images that support it, and for setting DPI manually and then having it properly taken into account when calculating image size. Paulo Coutinho provided support for static embedded fonts. Dan Meyers added support for embedded JavaScript. David Fish added a generic alias-replacement function to enable, among other things, table of contents functionality. Andy Bakun identified and corrected a problem in which the internal catalogs were not sorted stably. Paul Montag added encoding and decoding functionality for templates, including images that are embedded in templates; this allows templates to be stored independently of gofpdf. Paul also added support for page boxes used in printing PDF documents. Wojciech Matusiak added supported for word spacing. Artem Korotkiy added support of UTF-8 fonts. Dave Barnes added support for imported objects and templates. Brigham Thompson added support for rounded rectangles. Joe Westcott added underline functionality and optimized image storage. Benoit KUGLER contributed support for rectangles with corners of unequal radius, modification times, and for file attachments and annotations. - Remove all legacy code page font support; use UTF-8 exclusively - Improve test coverage as reported by the coverage tool. Example demonstrates the generation of a simple PDF document. Note that since only core fonts are used (in this case Arial, a synonym for Helvetica), an empty string can be specified for the font directory in the call to New(). Note also that the example.Filename() and example.Summary() functions belong to a separate, internal package and are not part of the gofpdf library. If an error occurs at some point during the construction of the document, subsequent method calls exit immediately and the error is finally retrieved with the output call where it can be handled by the application.

Package fpdf implements a PDF document generator with high level support for text, drawing and images. - UTF-8 support - Choice of measurement unit, page format and margins - Page header and footer management - Automatic page breaks, line breaks, and text justification - Inclusion of JPEG, PNG, GIF, TIFF and basic path-only SVG images - Colors, gradients and alpha channel transparency - Outline bookmarks - Internal and external links - TrueType, Type1 and encoding support - Page compression - Lines, Bézier curves, arcs, and ellipses - Rotation, scaling, skewing, translation, and mirroring - Clipping - Document protection - Layers - Templates - Barcodes - Charting facility - Import PDFs as templates go-pdf/fpdf has no dependencies other than the Go standard library. All tests pass on Linux, Mac and Windows platforms. go-pdf/fpdf supports UTF-8 TrueType fonts and “right-to-left” languages. Note that Chinese, Japanese, and Korean characters may not be included in many general purpose fonts. For these languages, a specialized font (for example, NotoSansSC for simplified Chinese) can be used. Also, support is provided to automatically translate UTF-8 runes to code page encodings for languages that have fewer than 256 glyphs. To install the package on your system, run Later, to receive updates, run The following Go code generates a simple PDF file. See the functions in the fpdf_test.go file (shown as examples in this documentation) for more advanced PDF examples. If an error occurs in an Fpdf method, an internal error field is set. After this occurs, Fpdf method calls typically return without performing any operations and the error state is retained. This error management scheme facilitates PDF generation since individual method calls do not need to be examined for failure; it is generally sufficient to wait until after Output() is called. For the same reason, if an error occurs in the calling application during PDF generation, it may be desirable for the application to transfer the error to the Fpdf instance by calling the SetError() method or the SetErrorf() method. At any time during the life cycle of the Fpdf instance, the error state can be determined with a call to Ok() or Err(). The error itself can be retrieved with a call to Error(). This package is a relatively straightforward translation from the original FPDF library written in PHP (despite the caveat in the introduction to Effective Go). The API names have been retained even though the Go idiom would suggest otherwise (for example, pdf.GetX() is used rather than simply pdf.X()). The similarity of the two libraries makes the original FPDF website a good source of information. It includes a forum and FAQ. However, some internal changes have been made. Page content is built up using buffers (of type bytes.Buffer) rather than repeated string concatenation. Errors are handled as explained above rather than panicking. Output is generated through an interface of type io.Writer or io.WriteCloser. A number of the original PHP methods behave differently based on the type of the arguments that are passed to them; in these cases additional methods have been exported to provide similar functionality. Font definition files are produced in JSON rather than PHP. A side effect of running go test ./... is the production of a number of example PDFs. These can be found in the go-pdf/fpdf/pdf directory after the tests complete. Please note that these examples run in the context of a test. In order run an example as a standalone application, you’ll need to examine fpdf_test.go for some helper routines, for example exampleFilename() and summary(). Example PDFs can be compared with reference copies in order to verify that they have been generated as expected. This comparison will be performed if a PDF with the same name as the example PDF is placed in the go-pdf/fpdf/pdf/reference directory and if the third argument to ComparePDFFiles() in internal/example/example.go is true. (By default it is false.) The routine that summarizes an example will look for this file and, if found, will call ComparePDFFiles() to check the example PDF for equality with its reference PDF. If differences exist between the two files they will be printed to standard output and the test will fail. If the reference file is missing, the comparison is considered to succeed. In order to successfully compare two PDFs, the placement of internal resources must be consistent and the internal creation timestamps must be the same. To do this, the methods SetCatalogSort() and SetCreationDate() need to be called for both files. This is done automatically for all examples. Nothing special is required to use the standard PDF fonts (courier, helvetica, times, zapfdingbats) in your documents other than calling SetFont(). You should use AddUTF8Font() or AddUTF8FontFromBytes() to add a TrueType UTF-8 encoded font. Use RTL() and LTR() methods switch between “right-to-left” and “left-to-right” mode. In order to use a different non-UTF-8 TrueType or Type1 font, you will need to generate a font definition file and, if the font will be embedded into PDFs, a compressed version of the font file. This is done by calling the MakeFont function or using the included makefont command line utility. To create the utility, cd into the makefont subdirectory and run “go build”. This will produce a standalone executable named makefont. Select the appropriate encoding file from the font subdirectory and run the command as in the following example. In your PDF generation code, call AddFont() to load the font and, as with the standard fonts, SetFont() to begin using it. Most examples, including the package example, demonstrate this method. Good sources of free, open-source fonts include Google Fonts and DejaVu Fonts. The draw2d package is a two dimensional vector graphics library that can generate output in different forms. It uses gofpdf for its document production mode. gofpdf is a global community effort and you are invited to make it even better. If you have implemented a new feature or corrected a problem, please consider contributing your change to the project. A contribution that does not directly pertain to the core functionality of gofpdf should be placed in its own directory directly beneath the contrib directory. Here are guidelines for making submissions. Your change should - be compatible with the MIT License - be properly documented - be formatted with go fmt - include an example in fpdf_test.go if appropriate - conform to the standards of golint and go vet, that is, golint . and go vet . should not generate any warnings - not diminish test coverage Pull requests are the preferred means of accepting your changes. gofpdf is released under the MIT License. It is copyrighted by Kurt Jung and the contributors acknowledged below. This package’s code and documentation are closely derived from the FPDF library created by Olivier Plathey, and a number of font and image resources are copied directly from it. Bruno Michel has provided valuable assistance with the code. Drawing support is adapted from the FPDF geometric figures script by David Hernández Sanz. Transparency support is adapted from the FPDF transparency script by Martin Hall-May. Support for gradients and clipping is adapted from FPDF scripts by Andreas Würmser. Support for outline bookmarks is adapted from Olivier Plathey by Manuel Cornes. Layer support is adapted from Olivier Plathey. Support for transformations is adapted from the FPDF transformation script by Moritz Wagner and Andreas Würmser. PDF protection is adapted from the work of Klemen Vodopivec for the FPDF product. Lawrence Kesteloot provided code to allow an image’s extent to be determined prior to placement. Support for vertical alignment within a cell was provided by Stefan Schroeder. Ivan Daniluk generalized the font and image loading code to use the Reader interface while maintaining backward compatibility. Anthony Starks provided code for the Polygon function. Robert Lillack provided the Beziergon function and corrected some naming issues with the internal curve function. Claudio Felber provided implementations for dashed line drawing and generalized font loading. Stani Michiels provided support for multi-segment path drawing with smooth line joins, line join styles, enhanced fill modes, and has helped greatly with package presentation and tests. Templating is adapted by Marcus Downing from the FPDF_Tpl library created by Jan Slabon and Setasign. Jelmer Snoeck contributed packages that generate a variety of barcodes and help with registering images on the web. Jelmer Snoek and Guillermo Pascual augmented the basic HTML functionality with aligned text. Kent Quirk implemented backwards-compatible support for reading DPI from images that support it, and for setting DPI manually and then having it properly taken into account when calculating image size. Paulo Coutinho provided support for static embedded fonts. Dan Meyers added support for embedded JavaScript. David Fish added a generic alias-replacement function to enable, among other things, table of contents functionality. Andy Bakun identified and corrected a problem in which the internal catalogs were not sorted stably. Paul Montag added encoding and decoding functionality for templates, including images that are embedded in templates; this allows templates to be stored independently of gofpdf. Paul also added support for page boxes used in printing PDF documents. Wojciech Matusiak added supported for word spacing. Artem Korotkiy added support of UTF-8 fonts. Dave Barnes added support for imported objects and templates. Brigham Thompson added support for rounded rectangles. Joe Westcott added underline functionality and optimized image storage. Benoit KUGLER contributed support for rectangles with corners of unequal radius, modification times, and for file attachments and annotations. - Remove all legacy code page font support; use UTF-8 exclusively - Improve test coverage as reported by the coverage tool. Example demonstrates the generation of a simple PDF document. Note that since only core fonts are used (in this case Arial, a synonym for Helvetica), an empty string can be specified for the font directory in the call to New(). Note also that the example.Filename() and example.SummaryCompare() functions belong to a separate, internal package and are not part of the gofpdf library. If an error occurs at some point during the construction of the document, subsequent method calls exit immediately and the error is finally retrieved with the output call where it can be handled by the application.

Package ql implements a pure Go embedded SQL database engine. Builder results available at QL is a member of the SQL family of languages. It is less complex and less powerful than SQL (whichever specification SQL is considered to be). 2020-12-10: sql/database driver now supports url parameter removeemptywal=N which has the same semantics as passing RemoveEmptyWAL = N != 0 to OpenFile options. 2020-11-09: Add IF NOT EXISTS support for the INSERT INTO statement. Add IsDuplicateUniqueIndexError function. 2018-11-04: Back end file format V2 is now released. To use the new format for newly created databases set the FileFormat field in *Options passed to OpenFile to value 2 or use the driver named "ql2" instead of "ql". - Both the old and new driver will properly open and use, read and write the old (V1) or new file (V2) format of an existing database. - V1 format has a record size limit of ~64 kB. V2 format record size limit is math.MaxInt32. - V1 format uncommitted transaction size is limited by memory resources. V2 format uncommitted transaction is limited by free disk space. - A direct consequence of the previous is that small transactions perform better using V1 format and big transactions perform better using V2 format. - V2 format uses substantially less memory. 2018-08-02: Release v1.2.0 adds initial support for Go modules. 2017-01-10: Release v1.1.0 fixes some bugs and adds a configurable WAL headroom. 2016-07-29: Release v1.0.6 enables alternatively using = instead of == for equality operation. 2016-07-11: Release v1.0.5 undoes vendoring of lldb. QL now uses stable lldb (modernc.org/lldb). 2016-07-06: Release v1.0.4 fixes a panic when closing the WAL file. 2016-04-03: Release v1.0.3 fixes a data race. 2016-03-23: Release v1.0.2 vendors gitlab.com/cznic/exp/lldb and github.com/camlistore/go4/lock. 2016-03-17: Release v1.0.1 adjusts for latest goyacc. Parser error messages are improved and changed, but their exact form is not considered a API change. 2016-03-05: The current version has been tagged v1.0.0. 2015-06-15: To improve compatibility with other SQL implementations, the count built-in aggregate function now accepts * as its argument. 2015-05-29: The execution planner was rewritten from scratch. It should use indices in all places where they were used before plus in some additional situations. It is possible to investigate the plan using the newly added EXPLAIN statement. The QL tool is handy for such analysis. If the planner would have used an index, but no such exists, the plan includes hints in form of copy/paste ready CREATE INDEX statements. The planner is still quite simple and a lot of work on it is yet ahead. You can help this process by filling an issue with a schema and query which fails to use an index or indices when it should, in your opinion. Bonus points for including output of `ql 'explain <query>'`. 2015-05-09: The grammar of the CREATE INDEX statement now accepts an expression list instead of a single expression, which was further limited to just a column name or the built-in id(). As a side effect, composite indices are now functional. However, the values in the expression-list style index are not yet used by other statements or the statement/query planner. The composite index is useful while having UNIQUE clause to check for semantically duplicate rows before they get added to the table or when such a row is mutated using the UPDATE statement and the expression-list style index tuple of the row is thus recomputed. 2015-05-02: The Schema field of table __Table now correctly reflects any column constraints and/or defaults. Also, the (*DB).Info method now has that information provided in new ColumInfo fields NotNull, Constraint and Default. 2015-04-20: Added support for {LEFT,RIGHT,FULL} [OUTER] JOIN. 2015-04-18: Column definitions can now have constraints and defaults. Details are discussed in the "Constraints and defaults" chapter below the CREATE TABLE statement documentation. 2015-03-06: New built-in functions formatFloat and formatInt. Thanks urandom! (https://github.com/urandom) 2015-02-16: IN predicate now accepts a SELECT statement. See the updated "Predicates" section. 2015-01-17: Logical operators || and && have now alternative spellings: OR and AND (case insensitive). AND was a keyword before, but OR is a new one. This can possibly break existing queries. For the record, it's a good idea to not use any name appearing in, for example, [7] in your queries as the list of QL's keywords may expand for gaining better compatibility with existing SQL "standards". 2015-01-12: ACID guarantees were tightened at the cost of performance in some cases. The write collecting window mechanism, a formerly used implementation detail, was removed. Inserting rows one by one in a transaction is now slow. I mean very slow. Try to avoid inserting single rows in a transaction. Instead, whenever possible, perform batch updates of tens to, say thousands of rows in a single transaction. See also: http://www.sqlite.org/faq.html#q19, the discussed synchronization principles involved are the same as for QL, modulo minor details. Note: A side effect is that closing a DB before exiting an application, both for the Go API and through database/sql driver, is no more required, strictly speaking. Beware that exiting an application while there is an open (uncommitted) transaction in progress means losing the transaction data. However, the DB will not become corrupted because of not closing it. Nor that was the case before, but formerly failing to close a DB could have resulted in losing the data of the last transaction. 2014-09-21: id() now optionally accepts a single argument - a table name. 2014-09-01: Added the DB.Flush() method and the LIKE pattern matching predicate. 2014-08-08: The built in functions max and min now accept also time values. Thanks opennota! (https://github.com/opennota) 2014-06-05: RecordSet interface extended by new methods FirstRow and Rows. 2014-06-02: Indices on id() are now used by SELECT statements. 2014-05-07: Introduction of Marshal, Schema, Unmarshal. 2014-04-15: Added optional IF NOT EXISTS clause to CREATE INDEX and optional IF EXISTS clause to DROP INDEX. 2014-04-12: The column Unique in the virtual table __Index was renamed to IsUnique because the old name is a keyword. Unfortunately, this is a breaking change, sorry. 2014-04-11: Introduction of LIMIT, OFFSET. 2014-04-10: Introduction of query rewriting. 2014-04-07: Introduction of indices. QL imports zappy[8], a block-based compressor, which speeds up its performance by using a C version of the compression/decompression algorithms. If a CGO-free (pure Go) version of QL, or an app using QL, is required, please include 'purego' in the -tags option of go {build,get,install}. For example: If zappy was installed before installing QL, it might be necessary to rebuild zappy first (or rebuild QL with all its dependencies using the -a option): The syntax is specified using Extended Backus-Naur Form (EBNF) Lower-case production names are used to identify lexical tokens. Non-terminals are in CamelCase. Lexical tokens are enclosed in double quotes "" or back quotes “. The form a … b represents the set of characters from a through b as alternatives. The horizontal ellipsis … is also used elsewhere in the spec to informally denote various enumerations or code snippets that are not further specified. QL source code is Unicode text encoded in UTF-8. The text is not canonicalized, so a single accented code point is distinct from the same character constructed from combining an accent and a letter; those are treated as two code points. For simplicity, this document will use the unqualified term character to refer to a Unicode code point in the source text. Each code point is distinct; for instance, upper and lower case letters are different characters. Implementation restriction: For compatibility with other tools, the parser may disallow the NUL character (U+0000) in the statement. Implementation restriction: A byte order mark is disallowed anywhere in QL statements. The following terms are used to denote specific character classes The underscore character _ (U+005F) is considered a letter. Lexical elements are comments, tokens, identifiers, keywords, operators and delimiters, integer, floating-point, imaginary, rune and string literals and QL parameters. Line comments start with the character sequence // or -- and stop at the end of the line. A line comment acts like a space. General comments start with the character sequence /* and continue through the character sequence */. A general comment acts like a space. Comments do not nest. Tokens form the vocabulary of QL. There are four classes: identifiers, keywords, operators and delimiters, and literals. White space, formed from spaces (U+0020), horizontal tabs (U+0009), carriage returns (U+000D), and newlines (U+000A), is ignored except as it separates tokens that would otherwise combine into a single token. The formal grammar uses semicolons ";" as separators of QL statements. A single QL statement or the last QL statement in a list of statements can have an optional semicolon terminator. (Actually a separator from the following empty statement.) Identifiers name entities such as tables or record set columns. There are two kinds of identifiers, normal idententifiers and quoted identifiers. An normal identifier is a sequence of one or more letters and digits. The first character in an identifier must be a letter. For example A quoted identifier is a string of any charaters between guillmets «». Quoted identifiers allow QL key words or phrases with spaces to be used as identifiers. The guillemets were chosen because QL already uses double quotes, single quotes, and backticks for other quoting purposes. «TRANSACTION» «duration» «lovely stories» No identifiers are predeclared, however note that no keyword can be used as a normal identifier. Identifiers starting with two underscores are used for meta data virtual tables names. For forward compatibility, users should generally avoid using any identifiers starting with two underscores. For example The following keywords are reserved and may not be used as identifiers. Keywords are not case sensitive. The following character sequences represent operators, delimiters, and other special tokens Operators consisting of more than one character are referred to by names in the rest of the documentation An integer literal is a sequence of digits representing an integer constant. An optional prefix sets a non-decimal base: 0 for octal, 0x or 0X for hexadecimal. In hexadecimal literals, letters a-f and A-F represent values 10 through 15. For example A floating-point literal is a decimal representation of a floating-point constant. It has an integer part, a decimal point, a fractional part, and an exponent part. The integer and fractional part comprise decimal digits; the exponent part is an e or E followed by an optionally signed decimal exponent. One of the integer part or the fractional part may be elided; one of the decimal point or the exponent may be elided. For example An imaginary literal is a decimal representation of the imaginary part of a complex constant. It consists of a floating-point literal or decimal integer followed by the lower-case letter i. For example A rune literal represents a rune constant, an integer value identifying a Unicode code point. A rune literal is expressed as one or more characters enclosed in single quotes. Within the quotes, any character may appear except single quote and newline. A single quoted character represents the Unicode value of the character itself, while multi-character sequences beginning with a backslash encode values in various formats. The simplest form represents the single character within the quotes; since QL statements are Unicode characters encoded in UTF-8, multiple UTF-8-encoded bytes may represent a single integer value. For instance, the literal 'a' holds a single byte representing a literal a, Unicode U+0061, value 0x61, while 'ä' holds two bytes (0xc3 0xa4) representing a literal a-dieresis, U+00E4, value 0xe4. Several backslash escapes allow arbitrary values to be encoded as ASCII text. There are four ways to represent the integer value as a numeric constant: \x followed by exactly two hexadecimal digits; \u followed by exactly four hexadecimal digits; \U followed by exactly eight hexadecimal digits, and a plain backslash \ followed by exactly three octal digits. In each case the value of the literal is the value represented by the digits in the corresponding base. Although these representations all result in an integer, they have different valid ranges. Octal escapes must represent a value between 0 and 255 inclusive. Hexadecimal escapes satisfy this condition by construction. The escapes \u and \U represent Unicode code points so within them some values are illegal, in particular those above 0x10FFFF and surrogate halves. After a backslash, certain single-character escapes represent special values All other sequences starting with a backslash are illegal inside rune literals. For example A string literal represents a string constant obtained from concatenating a sequence of characters. There are two forms: raw string literals and interpreted string literals. Raw string literals are character sequences between back quotes “. Within the quotes, any character is legal except back quote. The value of a raw string literal is the string composed of the uninterpreted (implicitly UTF-8-encoded) characters between the quotes; in particular, backslashes have no special meaning and the string may contain newlines. Carriage returns inside raw string literals are discarded from the raw string value. Interpreted string literals are character sequences between double quotes "". The text between the quotes, which may not contain newlines, forms the value of the literal, with backslash escapes interpreted as they are in rune literals (except that \' is illegal and \" is legal), with the same restrictions. The three-digit octal (\nnn) and two-digit hexadecimal (\xnn) escapes represent individual bytes of the resulting string; all other escapes represent the (possibly multi-byte) UTF-8 encoding of individual characters. Thus inside a string literal \377 and \xFF represent a single byte of value 0xFF=255, while ÿ, \u00FF, \U000000FF and \xc3\xbf represent the two bytes 0xc3 0xbf of the UTF-8 encoding of character U+00FF. For example These examples all represent the same string If the statement source represents a character as two code points, such as a combining form involving an accent and a letter, the result will be an error if placed in a rune literal (it is not a single code point), and will appear as two code points if placed in a string literal. Literals are assigned their values from the respective text representation at "compile" (parse) time. QL parameters provide the same functionality as literals, but their value is assigned at execution time from an expression list passed to DB.Run or DB.Execute. Using '?' or '$' is completely equivalent. For example Keywords 'false' and 'true' (not case sensitive) represent the two possible constant values of type bool (also not case sensitive). Keyword 'NULL' (not case sensitive) represents an untyped constant which is assignable to any type. NULL is distinct from any other value of any type. A type determines the set of values and operations specific to values of that type. A type is specified by a type name. Named instances of the boolean, numeric, and string types are keywords. The names are not case sensitive. Note: The blob type is exchanged between the back end and the API as []byte. On 32 bit platforms this limits the size which the implementation can handle to 2G. A boolean type represents the set of Boolean truth values denoted by the predeclared constants true and false. The predeclared boolean type is bool. A duration type represents the elapsed time between two instants as an int64 nanosecond count. The representation limits the largest representable duration to approximately 290 years. A numeric type represents sets of integer or floating-point values. The predeclared architecture-independent numeric types are The value of an n-bit integer is n bits wide and represented using two's complement arithmetic. Conversions are required when different numeric types are mixed in an expression or assignment. A string type represents the set of string values. A string value is a (possibly empty) sequence of bytes. The case insensitive keyword for the string type is 'string'. The length of a string (its size in bytes) can be discovered using the built-in function len. A time type represents an instant in time with nanosecond precision. Each time has associated with it a location, consulted when computing the presentation form of the time. The following functions are implicitly declared An expression specifies the computation of a value by applying operators and functions to operands. Operands denote the elementary values in an expression. An operand may be a literal, a (possibly qualified) identifier denoting a constant or a function or a table/record set column, or a parenthesized expression. A qualified identifier is an identifier qualified with a table/record set name prefix. For example Primary expression are the operands for unary and binary expressions. For example A primary expression of the form denotes the element of a string indexed by x. Its type is byte. The value x is called the index. The following rules apply - The index x must be of integer type except bigint or duration; it is in range if 0 <= x < len(s), otherwise it is out of range. - A constant index must be non-negative and representable by a value of type int. - A constant index must be in range if the string a is a literal. - If x is out of range at run time, a run-time error occurs. - s[x] is the byte at index x and the type of s[x] is byte. If s is NULL or x is NULL then the result is NULL. Otherwise s[x] is illegal. For a string, the primary expression constructs a substring. The indices low and high select which elements appear in the result. The result has indices starting at 0 and length equal to high - low. For convenience, any of the indices may be omitted. A missing low index defaults to zero; a missing high index defaults to the length of the sliced operand The indices low and high are in range if 0 <= low <= high <= len(a), otherwise they are out of range. A constant index must be non-negative and representable by a value of type int. If both indices are constant, they must satisfy low <= high. If the indices are out of range at run time, a run-time error occurs. Integer values of type bigint or duration cannot be used as indices. If s is NULL the result is NULL. If low or high is not omitted and is NULL then the result is NULL. Given an identifier f denoting a predeclared function, calls f with arguments a1, a2, … an. Arguments are evaluated before the function is called. The type of the expression is the result type of f. In a function call, the function value and arguments are evaluated in the usual order. After they are evaluated, the parameters of the call are passed by value to the function and the called function begins execution. The return value of the function is passed by value when the function returns. Calling an undefined function causes a compile-time error. Operators combine operands into expressions. Comparisons are discussed elsewhere. For other binary operators, the operand types must be identical unless the operation involves shifts or untyped constants. For operations involving constants only, see the section on constant expressions. Except for shift operations, if one operand is an untyped constant and the other operand is not, the constant is converted to the type of the other operand. The right operand in a shift expression must have unsigned integer type or be an untyped constant that can be converted to unsigned integer type. If the left operand of a non-constant shift expression is an untyped constant, the type of the constant is what it would be if the shift expression were replaced by its left operand alone. Expressions of the form yield a boolean value true if expr2, a regular expression, matches expr1 (see also [6]). Both expression must be of type string. If any one of the expressions is NULL the result is NULL. Predicates are special form expressions having a boolean result type. Expressions of the form are equivalent, including NULL handling, to The types of involved expressions must be comparable as defined in "Comparison operators". Another form of the IN predicate creates the expression list from a result of a SelectStmt. The SelectStmt must select only one column. The produced expression list is resource limited by the memory available to the process. NULL values produced by the SelectStmt are ignored, but if all records of the SelectStmt are NULL the predicate yields NULL. The select statement is evaluated only once. If the type of expr is not the same as the type of the field returned by the SelectStmt then the set operation yields false. The type of the column returned by the SelectStmt must be one of the simple (non blob-like) types: Expressions of the form are equivalent, including NULL handling, to The types of involved expressions must be ordered as defined in "Comparison operators". Expressions of the form yield a boolean value true if expr does not have a specific type (case A) or if expr has a specific type (case B). In other cases the result is a boolean value false. Unary operators have the highest precedence. There are five precedence levels for binary operators. Multiplication operators bind strongest, followed by addition operators, comparison operators, && (logical AND), and finally || (logical OR) Binary operators of the same precedence associate from left to right. For instance, x / y * z is the same as (x / y) * z. Note that the operator precedence is reflected explicitly by the grammar. Arithmetic operators apply to numeric values and yield a result of the same type as the first operand. The four standard arithmetic operators (+, -, *, /) apply to integer, rational, floating-point, and complex types; + also applies to strings; +,- also applies to times. All other arithmetic operators apply to integers only. sum integers, rationals, floats, complex values, strings difference integers, rationals, floats, complex values, times product integers, rationals, floats, complex values / quotient integers, rationals, floats, complex values % remainder integers & bitwise AND integers | bitwise OR integers ^ bitwise XOR integers &^ bit clear (AND NOT) integers << left shift integer << unsigned integer >> right shift integer >> unsigned integer Strings can be concatenated using the + operator String addition creates a new string by concatenating the operands. A value of type duration can be added to or subtracted from a value of type time. Times can subtracted from each other producing a value of type duration. For two integer values x and y, the integer quotient q = x / y and remainder r = x % y satisfy the following relationships with x / y truncated towards zero ("truncated division"). As an exception to this rule, if the dividend x is the most negative value for the int type of x, the quotient q = x / -1 is equal to x (and r = 0). If the divisor is a constant expression, it must not be zero. If the divisor is zero at run time, a run-time error occurs. If the dividend is non-negative and the divisor is a constant power of 2, the division may be replaced by a right shift, and computing the remainder may be replaced by a bitwise AND operation The shift operators shift the left operand by the shift count specified by the right operand. They implement arithmetic shifts if the left operand is a signed integer and logical shifts if it is an unsigned integer. There is no upper limit on the shift count. Shifts behave as if the left operand is shifted n times by 1 for a shift count of n. As a result, x << 1 is the same as x*2 and x >> 1 is the same as x/2 but truncated towards negative infinity. For integer operands, the unary operators +, -, and ^ are defined as follows For floating-point and complex numbers, +x is the same as x, while -x is the negation of x. The result of a floating-point or complex division by zero is not specified beyond the IEEE-754 standard; whether a run-time error occurs is implementation-specific. Whenever any operand of any arithmetic operation, unary or binary, is NULL, as well as in the case of the string concatenating operation, the result is NULL. For unsigned integer values, the operations +, -, *, and << are computed modulo 2n, where n is the bit width of the unsigned integer's type. Loosely speaking, these unsigned integer operations discard high bits upon overflow, and expressions may rely on “wrap around”. For signed integers with a finite bit width, the operations +, -, *, and << may legally overflow and the resulting value exists and is deterministically defined by the signed integer representation, the operation, and its operands. No exception is raised as a result of overflow. An evaluator may not optimize an expression under the assumption that overflow does not occur. For instance, it may not assume that x < x + 1 is always true. Integers of type bigint and rationals do not overflow but their handling is limited by the memory resources available to the program. Comparison operators compare two operands and yield a boolean value. In any comparison, the first operand must be of same type as is the second operand, or vice versa. The equality operators == and != apply to operands that are comparable. The ordering operators <, <=, >, and >= apply to operands that are ordered. These terms and the result of the comparisons are defined as follows - Boolean values are comparable. Two boolean values are equal if they are either both true or both false. - Complex values are comparable. Two complex values u and v are equal if both real(u) == real(v) and imag(u) == imag(v). - Integer values are comparable and ordered, in the usual way. Note that durations are integers. - Floating point values are comparable and ordered, as defined by the IEEE-754 standard. - Rational values are comparable and ordered, in the usual way. - String and Blob values are comparable and ordered, lexically byte-wise. - Time values are comparable and ordered. Whenever any operand of any comparison operation is NULL, the result is NULL. Note that slices are always of type string. Logical operators apply to boolean values and yield a boolean result. The right operand is evaluated conditionally. The truth tables for logical operations with NULL values Conversions are expressions of the form T(x) where T is a type and x is an expression that can be converted to type T. A constant value x can be converted to type T in any of these cases: - x is representable by a value of type T. - x is a floating-point constant, T is a floating-point type, and x is representable by a value of type T after rounding using IEEE 754 round-to-even rules. The constant T(x) is the rounded value. - x is an integer constant and T is a string type. The same rule as for non-constant x applies in this case. Converting a constant yields a typed constant as result. A non-constant value x can be converted to type T in any of these cases: - x has type T. - x's type and T are both integer or floating point types. - x's type and T are both complex types. - x is an integer, except bigint or duration, and T is a string type. Specific rules apply to (non-constant) conversions between numeric types or to and from a string type. These conversions may change the representation of x and incur a run-time cost. All other conversions only change the type but not the representation of x. A conversion of NULL to any type yields NULL. For the conversion of non-constant numeric values, the following rules apply 1. When converting between integer types, if the value is a signed integer, it is sign extended to implicit infinite precision; otherwise it is zero extended. It is then truncated to fit in the result type's size. For example, if v == uint16(0x10F0), then uint32(int8(v)) == 0xFFFFFFF0. The conversion always yields a valid value; there is no indication of overflow. 2. When converting a floating-point number to an integer, the fraction is discarded (truncation towards zero). 3. When converting an integer or floating-point number to a floating-point type, or a complex number to another complex type, the result value is rounded to the precision specified by the destination type. For instance, the value of a variable x of type float32 may be stored using additional precision beyond that of an IEEE-754 32-bit number, but float32(x) represents the result of rounding x's value to 32-bit precision. Similarly, x + 0.1 may use more than 32 bits of precision, but float32(x + 0.1) does not. In all non-constant conversions involving floating-point or complex values, if the result type cannot represent the value the conversion succeeds but the result value is implementation-dependent. 1. Converting a signed or unsigned integer value to a string type yields a string containing the UTF-8 representation of the integer. Values outside the range of valid Unicode code points are converted to "\uFFFD". 2. Converting a blob to a string type yields a string whose successive bytes are the elements of the blob. 3. Converting a value of a string type to a blob yields a blob whose successive elements are the bytes of the string. 4. Converting a value of a bigint type to a string yields a string containing the decimal decimal representation of the integer. 5. Converting a value of a string type to a bigint yields a bigint value containing the integer represented by the string value. A prefix of “0x” or “0X” selects base 16; the “0” prefix selects base 8, and a “0b” or “0B” prefix selects base 2. Otherwise the value is interpreted in base 10. An error occurs if the string value is not in any valid format. 6. Converting a value of a rational type to a string yields a string containing the decimal decimal representation of the rational in the form "a/b" (even if b == 1). 7. Converting a value of a string type to a bigrat yields a bigrat value containing the rational represented by the string value. The string can be given as a fraction "a/b" or as a floating-point number optionally followed by an exponent. An error occurs if the string value is not in any valid format. 8. Converting a value of a duration type to a string returns a string representing the duration in the form "72h3m0.5s". Leading zero units are omitted. As a special case, durations less than one second format using a smaller unit (milli-, micro-, or nanoseconds) to ensure that the leading digit is non-zero. The zero duration formats as 0, with no unit. 9. Converting a string value to a duration yields a duration represented by the string. A duration string is a possibly signed sequence of decimal numbers, each with optional fraction and a unit suffix, such as "300ms", "-1.5h" or "2h45m". Valid time units are "ns", "us" (or "µs"), "ms", "s", "m", "h". 10. Converting a time value to a string returns the time formatted using the format string When evaluating the operands of an expression or of function calls, operations are evaluated in lexical left-to-right order. For example, in the evaluation of the function calls and evaluation of c happen in the order h(), i(), j(), c. Floating-point operations within a single expression are evaluated according to the associativity of the operators. Explicit parentheses affect the evaluation by overriding the default associativity. In the expression x + (y + z) the addition y + z is performed before adding x. Statements control execution. The empty statement does nothing. Alter table statements modify existing tables. With the ADD clause it adds a new column to the table. The column must not exist. With the DROP clause it removes an existing column from a table. The column must exist and it must be not the only (last) column of the table. IOW, there cannot be a table with no columns. For example When adding a column to a table with existing data, the constraint clause of the ColumnDef cannot be used. Adding a constrained column to an empty table is fine. Begin transactions statements introduce a new transaction level. Every transaction level must be eventually balanced by exactly one of COMMIT or ROLLBACK statements. Note that when a transaction is roll-backed because of a statement failure then no explicit balancing of the respective BEGIN TRANSACTION is statement is required nor permitted. Failure to properly balance any opened transaction level may cause dead locks and/or lose of data updated in the uppermost opened but never properly closed transaction level. For example A database cannot be updated (mutated) outside of a transaction. Statements requiring a transaction A database is effectively read only outside of a transaction. Statements not requiring a transaction The commit statement closes the innermost transaction nesting level. If that's the outermost level then the updates to the DB made by the transaction are atomically made persistent. For example Create index statements create new indices. Index is a named projection of ordered values of a table column to the respective records. As a special case the id() of the record can be indexed. Index name must not be the same as any of the existing tables and it also cannot be the same as of any column name of the table the index is on. For example Now certain SELECT statements may use the indices to speed up joins and/or to speed up record set filtering when the WHERE clause is used; or the indices might be used to improve the performance when the ORDER BY clause is present. The UNIQUE modifier requires the indexed values tuple to be index-wise unique or have all values NULL. The optional IF NOT EXISTS clause makes the statement a no operation if the index already exists. A simple index consists of only one expression which must be either a column name or the built-in id(). A more complex and more general index is one that consists of more than one expression or its single expression does not qualify as a simple index. In this case the type of all expressions in the list must be one of the non blob-like types. Note: Blob-like types are blob, bigint, bigrat, time and duration. Create table statements create new tables. A column definition declares the column name and type. Table names and column names are case sensitive. Neither a table or an index of the same name may exist in the DB. For example The optional IF NOT EXISTS clause makes the statement a no operation if the table already exists. The optional constraint clause has two forms. The first one is found in many SQL dialects. This form prevents the data in column DepartmentName to be NULL. The second form allows an arbitrary boolean expression to be used to validate the column. If the value of the expression is true then the validation succeeded. If the value of the expression is false or NULL then the validation fails. If the value of the expression is not of type bool an error occurs. The optional DEFAULT clause is an expression which, if present, is substituted instead of a NULL value when the colum is assigned a value. Note that the constraint and/or default expressions may refer to other columns by name: When a table row is inserted by the INSERT INTO statement or when a table row is updated by the UPDATE statement, the order of operations is as follows: 1. The new values of the affected columns are set and the values of all the row columns become the named values which can be referred to in default expressions evaluated in step 2. 2. If any row column value is NULL and the DEFAULT clause is present in the column's definition, the default expression is evaluated and its value is set as the respective column value. 3. The values, potentially updated, of row columns become the named values which can be referred to in constraint expressions evaluated during step 4. 4. All row columns which definition has the constraint clause present will have that constraint checked. If any constraint violation is detected, the overall operation fails and no changes to the table are made. Delete from statements remove rows from a table, which must exist. For example If the WHERE clause is not present then all rows are removed and the statement is equivalent to the TRUNCATE TABLE statement. Drop index statements remove indices from the DB. The index must exist. For example The optional IF EXISTS clause makes the statement a no operation if the index does not exist. Drop table statements remove tables from the DB. The table must exist. For example The optional IF EXISTS clause makes the statement a no operation if the table does not exist. Insert into statements insert new rows into tables. New rows come from literal data, if using the VALUES clause, or are a result of select statement. In the later case the select statement is fully evaluated before the insertion of any rows is performed, allowing to insert values calculated from the same table rows are to be inserted into. If the ColumnNameList part is omitted then the number of values inserted in the row must be the same as are columns in the table. If the ColumnNameList part is present then the number of values per row must be same as the same number of column names. All other columns of the record are set to NULL. The type of the value assigned to a column must be the same as is the column's type or the value must be NULL. If there exists an unique index that would make the insert statement fail, the optional IF NOT EXISTS turns the insert statement in such case into a no-op. For example If any of the columns of the table were defined using the optional constraints clause or the optional defaults clause then those are processed on a per row basis. The details are discussed in the "Constraints and defaults" chapter below the CREATE TABLE statement documentation. Explain statement produces a recordset consisting of lines of text which describe the execution plan of a statement, if any. For example, the QL tool treats the explain statement specially and outputs the joined lines: The explanation may aid in uderstanding how a statement/query would be executed and if indices are used as expected - or which indices may possibly improve the statement performance. The create index statements above were directly copy/pasted in the terminal from the suggestions provided by the filter recordset pipeline part returned by the explain statement. If the statement has nothing special in its plan, the result is the original statement. To get an explanation of the select statement of the IN predicate, use the EXPLAIN statement with that particular select statement. The rollback statement closes the innermost transaction nesting level discarding any updates to the DB made by it. If that's the outermost level then the effects on the DB are as if the transaction never happened. For example The (temporary) record set from the last statement is returned and can be processed by the client. In this case the rollback is the same as 'DROP TABLE tmp;' but it can be a more complex operation. Select from statements produce recordsets. The optional DISTINCT modifier ensures all rows in the result recordset are unique. Either all of the resulting fields are returned ('*') or only those named in FieldList. RecordSetList is a list of table names or parenthesized select statements, optionally (re)named using the AS clause. The result can be filtered using a WhereClause and orderd by the OrderBy clause. For example If Recordset is a nested, parenthesized SelectStmt then it must be given a name using the AS clause if its field are to be accessible in expressions. A field is an named expression. Identifiers, not used as a type in conversion or a function name in the Call clause, denote names of (other) fields, values of which should be used in the expression. The expression can be named using the AS clause. If the AS clause is not present and the expression consists solely of a field name, then that field name is used as the name of the resulting field. Otherwise the field is unnamed. For example The SELECT statement can optionally enumerate the desired/resulting fields in a list. No two identical field names can appear in the list. When more than one record set is used in the FROM clause record set list, the result record set field names are rewritten to be qualified using the record set names. If a particular record set doesn't have a name, its respective fields became unnamed. The optional JOIN clause, for example is mostly equal to except that the rows from a which, when they appear in the cross join, never made expr to evaluate to true, are combined with a virtual row from b, containing all nulls, and added to the result set. For the RIGHT JOIN variant the discussed rules are used for rows from b not satisfying expr == true and the virtual, all-null row "comes" from a. The FULL JOIN adds the respective rows which would be otherwise provided by the separate executions of the LEFT JOIN and RIGHT JOIN variants. For more thorough OUTER JOIN discussion please see the Wikipedia article at [10]. Resultins rows of a SELECT statement can be optionally ordered by the ORDER BY clause. Collating proceeds by considering the expressions in the expression list left to right until a collating order is determined. Any possibly remaining expressions are not evaluated. All of the expression values must yield an ordered type or NULL. Ordered types are defined in "Comparison operators". Collating of elements having a NULL value is different compared to what the comparison operators yield in expression evaluation (NULL result instead of a boolean value). Below, T denotes a non NULL value of any QL type. NULL collates before any non NULL value (is considered smaller than T). Two NULLs have no collating order (are considered equal). The WHERE clause restricts records considered by some statements, like SELECT FROM, DELETE FROM, or UPDATE. It is an error if the expression evaluates to a non null value of non bool type. Another form of the WHERE clause is an existence predicate of a parenthesized select statement. The EXISTS form evaluates to true if the parenthesized SELECT statement produces a non empty record set. The NOT EXISTS form evaluates to true if the parenthesized SELECT statement produces an empty record set. The parenthesized SELECT statement is evaluated only once (TODO issue #159). The GROUP BY clause is used to project rows having common values into a smaller set of rows. For example Using the GROUP BY without any aggregate functions in the selected fields is in certain cases equal to using the DISTINCT modifier. The last two examples above produce the same resultsets. The optional OFFSET clause allows to ignore first N records. For example The above will produce only rows 11, 12, ... of the record set, if they exist. The value of the expression must a non negative integer, but not bigint or duration. The optional LIMIT clause allows to ignore all but first N records. For example The above will return at most the first 10 records of the record set. The value of the expression must a non negative integer, but not bigint or duration. The LIMIT and OFFSET clauses can be combined. For example Considering table t has, say 10 records, the above will produce only records 4 - 8. After returning record #8, no more result rows/records are computed. 1. The FROM clause is evaluated, producing a Cartesian product of its source record sets (tables or nested SELECT statements). 2. If present, the JOIN cluase is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation and the recordset specified by the JOIN clause. (... JOIN Recordset ON ...) 3. If present, the WHERE clause is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation. 4. If present, the GROUP BY clause is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). 5. The SELECT field expressions are evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). 6. If present, the DISTINCT modifier is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). 7. If present, the ORDER BY clause is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). 8. If present, the OFFSET clause is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). The offset expression is evaluated once for the first record produced by the previous evaluations. 9. If present, the LIMIT clause is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). The limit expression is evaluated once for the first record produced by the previous evaluations. Truncate table statements remove all records from a table. The table must exist. For example Update statements change values of fields in rows of a table. For example Note: The SET clause is optional. If any of the columns of the table were defined using the optional constraints clause or the optional defaults clause then those are processed on a per row basis. The details are discussed in the "Constraints and defaults" chapter below the CREATE TABLE statement documentation. To allow to query for DB meta data, there exist specially named tables, some of them being virtual. Note: Virtual system tables may have fake table-wise unique but meaningless and unstable record IDs. Do not apply the built-in id() to any system table. The table __Table lists all tables in the DB. The schema is The Schema column returns the statement to (re)create table Name. This table is virtual. The table __Colum lists all columns of all tables in the DB. The schema is The Ordinal column defines the 1-based index of the column in the record. This table is virtual. The table __Colum2 lists all columns of all tables in the DB which have the constraint NOT NULL or which have a constraint expression defined or which have a default expression defined. The schema is It's possible to obtain a consolidated recordset for all properties of all DB columns using The Name column is the column name in TableName. The table __Index lists all indices in the DB. The schema is The IsUnique columns reflects if the index was created using the optional UNIQUE clause. This table is virtual. Built-in functions are predeclared. The built-in aggregate function avg returns the average of values of an expression. Avg ignores NULL values, but returns NULL if all values of a column are NULL or if avg is applied to an empty record set. The column values must be of a numeric type. The built-in function coalesce takes at least one argument and returns the first of its arguments which is not NULL. If all arguments are NULL, this function returns NULL. This is useful for providing defaults for NULL values in a select query. The built-in function contains returns true if substr is within s. If any argument to contains is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in aggregate function count returns how many times an expression has a non NULL values or the number of rows in a record set. Note: count() returns 0 for an empty record set. For example Date returns the time corresponding to in the appropriate zone for that time in the given location. The month, day, hour, min, sec, and nsec values may be outside their usual ranges and will be normalized during the conversion. For example, October 32 converts to November 1. A daylight savings time transition skips or repeats times. For example, in the United States, March 13, 2011 2:15am never occurred, while November 6, 2011 1:15am occurred twice. In such cases, the choice of time zone, and therefore the time, is not well-defined. Date returns a time that is correct in one of the two zones involved in the transition, but it does not guarantee which. A location maps time instants to the zone in use at that time. Typically, the location represents the collection of time offsets in use in a geographical area, such as "CEST" and "CET" for central Europe. "local" represents the system's local time zone. "UTC" represents Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). The month specifies a month of the year (January = 1, ...). If any argument to date is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function day returns the day of the month specified by t. If the argument to day is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function formatTime returns a textual representation of the time value formatted according to layout, which defines the format by showing how the reference time, would be displayed if it were the value; it serves as an example of the desired output. The same display rules will then be applied to the time value. If any argument to formatTime is NULL the result is NULL. NOTE: The string value of the time zone, like "CET" or "ACDT", is dependent on the time zone of the machine the function is run on. For example, if the t value is in "CET", but the machine is in "ACDT", instead of "CET" the result is "+0100". This is the same what Go (time.Time).String() returns and in fact formatTime directly calls t.String(). returns on a machine in the CET time zone, but may return on a machine in the ACDT zone. The time value is in both cases the same so its ordering and comparing is correct. Only the display value can differ. The built-in functions formatFloat and formatInt format numbers to strings using go's number format functions in the `strconv` package. For all three functions, only the first argument is mandatory. The default values of the rest are shown in the examples. If the first argument is NULL, the result is NULL. returns returns returns Unlike the `strconv` equivalent, the formatInt function handles all integer types, both signed and unsigned. The built-in function hasPrefix tests whether the string s begins with prefix. If any argument to hasPrefix is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function hasSuffix tests whether the string s ends with suffix. If any argument to hasSuffix is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function hour returns the hour within the day specified by t, in the range [0, 23]. If the argument to hour is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function hours returns the duration as a floating point number of hours. If the argument to hours is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function id takes zero or one arguments. If no argument is provided, id() returns a table-unique automatically assigned numeric identifier of type int. Ids of deleted records are not reused unless the DB becomes completely empty (has no tables). For example If id() without arguments is called for a row which is not a table record then the result value is NULL. For example If id() has one argument it must be a table name of a table in a cross join. For example The built-in function len takes a string argument and returns the lentgh of the string in bytes. The expression len(s) is constant if s is a string constant. If the argument to len is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in aggregate function max returns the largest value of an expression in a record set. Max ignores NULL values, but returns NULL if all values of a column are NULL or if max is applied to an empty record set. The expression values must be of an ordered type. For example The built-in aggregate function min returns the smallest value of an expression in a record set. Min ignores NULL values, but returns NULL if all values of a column are NULL or if min is applied to an empty record set. For example The column values must be of an ordered type. The built-in function minute returns the minute offset within the hour specified by t, in the range [0, 59]. If the argument to minute is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function minutes returns the duration as a floating point number of minutes. If the argument to minutes is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function month returns the month of the year specified by t (January = 1, ...). If the argument to month is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function nanosecond returns the nanosecond offset within the second specified by t, in the range [0, 999999999]. If the argument to nanosecond is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function nanoseconds returns the duration as an integer nanosecond count. If the argument to nanoseconds is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function now returns the current local time. The built-in function parseTime parses a formatted string and returns the time value it represents. The layout defines the format by showing how the reference time, would be interpreted if it were the value; it serves as an example of the input format. The same interpretation will then be made to the input string. Elements omitted from the value are assumed to be zero or, when zero is impossible, one, so parsing "3:04pm" returns the time corresponding to Jan 1, year 0, 15:04:00 UTC (note that because the year is 0, this time is before the zero Time). Years must be in the range 0000..9999. The day of the week is checked for syntax but it is otherwise ignored. In the absence of a time zone indicator, parseTime returns a time in UTC. When parsing a time with a zone offset like -0700, if the offset corresponds to a time zone used by the current location, then parseTime uses that location and zone in the returned time. Otherwise it records the time as being in a fabricated location with time fixed at the given zone offset. When parsing a time with a zone abbreviation like MST, if the zone abbreviation has a defined offset in the current location, then that offset is used. The zone abbreviation "UTC" is recognized as UTC regardless of location. If the zone abbreviation is unknown, Parse records the time as being in a fabricated location with the given zone abbreviation and a zero offset. This choice means that such a time can be parses and reformatted with the same layout losslessly, but the exact instant used in the representation will differ by the actual zone offset. To avoid such problems, prefer time layouts that use a numeric zone offset. If any argument to parseTime is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function second returns the second offset within the minute specified by t, in the range [0, 59]. If the argument to second is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function seconds returns the duration as a floating point number of seconds. If the argument to seconds is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function since returns the time elapsed since t. It is shorthand for now()-t. If the argument to since is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in aggregate function sum returns the sum of values of an expression for all rows of a record set. Sum ignores NULL values, but returns NULL if all values of a column are NULL or if sum is applied to an empty record set. The column values must be of a numeric type. The built-in function timeIn returns t with the location information set to loc. For discussion of the loc argument please see date(). If any argument to timeIn is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function weekday returns the day of the week specified by t. Sunday == 0, Monday == 1, ... If the argument to weekday is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function year returns the year in which t occurs. If the argument to year is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function yearDay returns the day of the year specified by t, in the range [1,365] for non-leap years, and [1,366] in leap years. If the argument to yearDay is NULL the result is NULL. Three functions assemble and disassemble complex numbers. The built-in function complex constructs a complex value from a floating-point real and imaginary part, while real and imag extract the real and imaginary parts of a complex value. The type of the arguments and return value correspond. For complex, the two arguments must be of the same floating-point type and the return type is the complex type with the corresponding floating-point constituents: complex64 for float32, complex128 for float64. The real and imag functions together form the inverse, so for a complex value z, z == complex(real(z), imag(z)). If the operands of these functions are all constants, the return value is a constant. If any argument to any of complex, real, imag functions is NULL the result is NULL. For the numeric types, the following sizes are guaranteed Portions of this specification page are modifications based on work[2] created and shared by Google[3] and used according to terms described in the Creative Commons 3.0 Attribution License[4]. This specification is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution 3.0 License, and code is licensed under a BSD license[5]. Links from the above documentation This section is not part of the specification. WARNING: The implementation of indices is new and it surely needs more time to become mature. Indices are used currently used only by the WHERE clause. The following expression patterns of 'WHERE expression' are recognized and trigger index use. The relOp is one of the relation operators <, <=, ==, >=, >. For the equality operator both operands must be of comparable types. For all other operators both operands must be of ordered types. The constant expression is a compile time constant expression. Some constant folding is still a TODO. Parameter is a QL parameter ($1 etc.). Consider tables t and u, both with an indexed field f. The WHERE expression doesn't comply with the above simple detected cases. However, such query is now automatically rewritten to which will use both of the indices. The impact of using the indices can be substantial (cf. BenchmarkCrossJoin*) if the resulting rows have low "selectivity", ie. only few rows from both tables are selected by the respective WHERE filtering. Note: Existing QL DBs can be used and indices can be added to them. However, once any indices are present in the DB, the old QL versions cannot work with such DB anymore. Running a benchmark with -v (-test.v) outputs information about the scale used to report records/s and a brief description of the benchmark. For example Running the full suite of benchmarks takes a lot of time. Use the -timeout flag to avoid them being killed after the default time limit (10 minutes).

Package conn defines core interfaces for protocols and connections. This package and its subpackages describe the base interfaces to connect the software with the real world. It doesn't contain any implementation but includes registries to enable the application to discover the available hardware. periph uses 3 layered concepts for interfacing: Not every subpackage expose all 3 concepts. In fact, most packages don't. For example, SPI doesn't expose Bus as the OSes generally only expose the Port, that is, a Chip Select (CS) line must be selected right upfront to get an handle. For I²C, there's no Port to configure, so selecting a "slave" address is sufficient to jump directly from a Bus to a Conn. periph doesn't have yet a concept of star-like communication network, like an IP network. A Bus is a multi-point communication channel where one "master" and multiple "slaves" communicate together. In the case of periph, the Bus handle is assumed to be the "master". The "master" generally initiates communications and selects the "slave" to talk to. As the "master" selects a "slave" over a bus, a virtual Port is automatically created. Examples include SPI, I²C and 1-wire. In each case, selecting a communication line (Chip Select (CS) line for SPI, address for I²C or 1-wire) converts the Bus into a Port. A port is a point-to-point communication channel that is yet to be initialized. It cannot be used for communication until it is connected and transformed into a Conn. Configuring a Port converts it into a Conn. Not all Port need configuration. A Conn is a fully configured half or full duplex communication channel that is point-to-point, only between two devices. It is ready to use like any readable and/or writable pipe. Most connection-type specific subpackages include subpackages: → XXXreg: registry as that is populated by the host drivers and that can be leveraged by applications. → XXXtest: fake implementation that can be leveraged when writing device driver unit test.

Package CloudForest implements ensembles of decision trees for machine learning in pure Go (golang to search engines). It allows for a number of related algorithms for classification, regression, feature selection and structure analysis on heterogeneous numerical/categorical data with missing values. These include: Breiman and Cutler's Random Forest for Classification and Regression Adaptive Boosting (AdaBoost) Classification Gradiant Boosting Tree Regression Entropy and Cost driven classification L1 regression Feature selection with artificial contrasts Proximity and model structure analysis Roughly balanced bagging for unbalanced classification The API hasn't stabilized yet and may change rapidly. Tests and benchmarks have been performed only on embargoed data sets and can not yet be released. Library Documentation is in code and can be viewed with godoc or live at: http://godoc.org/github.com/ryanbressler/CloudForest Documentation of command line utilities and file formats can be found in README.md, which can be viewed fromated on github: http://github.com/ryanbressler/CloudForest Pull requests and bug reports are welcome. CloudForest was created by Ryan Bressler and is being developed in the Shumelivich Lab at the Institute for Systems Biology for use on genomic/biomedical data with partial support from The Cancer Genome Atlas and the Inova Translational Medicine Institute. CloudForest is intended to provide fast, comprehensible building blocks that can be used to implement ensembles of decision trees. CloudForest is written in Go to allow a data scientist to develop and scale new models and analysis quickly instead of having to modify complex legacy code. Data structures and file formats are chosen with use in multi threaded and cluster environments in mind. Go's support for function types is used to provide a interface to run code as data is percolated through a tree. This method is flexible enough that it can extend the tree being analyzed. Growing a decision tree using Breiman and Cutler's method can be done in an anonymous function/closure passed to a tree's root node's Recurse method: This allows a researcher to include whatever additional analysis they need (importance scores, proximity etc) in tree growth. The same Recurse method can also be used to analyze existing forests to tabulate scores or extract structure. Utilities like leafcount and errorrate use this method to tabulate data about the tree in collection objects. Decision tree's are grown with the goal of reducing "Impurity" which is usually defined as Gini Impurity for categorical targets or mean squared error for numerical targets. CloudForest grows trees against the Target interface which allows for alternative definitions of impurity. CloudForest includes several alternative targets: Additional targets can be stacked on top of these target to add boosting functionality: Repeatedly splitting the data and searching for the best split at each node of a decision tree are the most computationally intensive parts of decision tree learning and CloudForest includes optimized code to perform these tasks. Go's slices are used extensively in CloudForest to make it simple to interact with optimized code. Many previous implementations of Random Forest have avoided reallocation by reordering data in place and keeping track of start and end indexes. In go, slices pointing at the same underlying arrays make this sort of optimization transparent. For example a function like: can return left and right slices that point to the same underlying array as the original slice of cases but these slices should not have their values changed. Functions used while searching for the best split also accepts pointers to reusable slices and structs to maximize speed by keeping memory allocations to a minimum. BestSplitAllocs contains pointers to these items and its use can be seen in functions like: For categorical predictors, BestSplit will also attempt to intelligently choose between 4 different implementations depending on user input and the number of categories. These include exhaustive, random, and iterative searches for the best combination of categories implemented with bitwise operations against int and big.Int. See BestCatSplit, BestCatSplitIter, BestCatSplitBig and BestCatSplitIterBig. All numerical predictors are handled by BestNumSplit which relies on go's sorting package. Training a Random forest is an inherently parallel process and CloudForest is designed to allow parallel implementations that can tackle large problems while keeping memory usage low by writing and using data structures directly to/from disk. Trees can be grown in separate go routines. The growforest utility provides an example of this that uses go routines and channels to grow trees in parallel and write trees to disk as the are finished by the "worker" go routines. The few summary statistics like mean impurity decrease per feature (importance) can be calculated using thread safe data structures like RunningMean. Trees can also be grown on separate machines. The .sf stochastic forest format allows several small forests to be combined by concatenation and the ForestReader and ForestWriter structs allow these forests to be accessed tree by tree (or even node by node) from disk. For data sets that are too big to fit in memory on a single machine Tree.Grow and FeatureMatrix.BestSplitter can be reimplemented to load candidate features from disk, distributed database etc. By default cloud forest uses a fast heuristic for missing values. When proposing a split on a feature with missing data the missing cases are removed and the impurity value is corrected to use three way impurity which reduces the bias towards features with lots of missing data: Missing values in the target variable are left out of impurity calculations. This provided generally good results at a fraction of the computational costs of imputing data. Optionally, feature.ImputeMissing or featurematrixImputeMissing can be called before forest growth to impute missing values to the feature mean/mode which Brieman [2] suggests as a fast method for imputing values. This forest could also be analyzed for proximity (using leafcount or tree.GetLeaves) to do the more accurate proximity weighted imputation Brieman describes. Experimental support is provided for 3 way splitting which splits missing cases onto a third branch. [2] This has so far yielded mixed results in testing. At some point in the future support may be added for local imputing of missing values during tree growth as described in [3] [1] http://www.stat.berkeley.edu/~breiman/RandomForests/cc_home.htm#missing1 [2] https://code.google.com/p/rf-ace/ [3] http://projecteuclid.org/DPubS?verb=Display&version=1.0&service=UI&handle=euclid.aoas/1223908043&page=record In CloudForest data is stored using the FeatureMatrix struct which contains Features. The Feature struct implements storage and methods for both categorical and numerical data and calculations of impurity etc and the search for the best split. The Target interface abstracts the methods of Feature that are needed for a feature to be predictable. This allows for the implementation of alternative types of regression and classification. Trees are built from Nodes and Splitters and stored within a Forest. Tree has a Grow implements Brieman and Cutler's method (see extract above) for growing a tree. A GrowForest method is also provided that implements the rest of the method including sampling cases but it may be faster to grow the forest to disk as in the growforest utility. Prediction and Voting is done using Tree.Vote and CatBallotBox and NumBallotBox which implement the VoteTallyer interface.

Package gofpdf implements a PDF document generator with high level support for text, drawing and images. - UTF-8 support - Choice of measurement unit, page format and margins - Page header and footer management - Automatic page breaks, line breaks, and text justification - Inclusion of JPEG, PNG, GIF, TIFF and basic path-only SVG images - Colors, gradients and alpha channel transparency - Outline bookmarks - Internal and external links - TrueType, Type1 and encoding support - Page compression - Lines, Bézier curves, arcs, and ellipses - Rotation, scaling, skewing, translation, and mirroring - Clipping - Document protection - Layers - Templates - Barcodes - Charting facility - Import PDFs as templates gofpdf has no dependencies other than the Go standard library. All tests pass on Linux, Mac and Windows platforms. gofpdf supports UTF-8 TrueType fonts and “right-to-left” languages. Note that Chinese, Japanese, and Korean characters may not be included in many general purpose fonts. For these languages, a specialized font (for example, NotoSansSC for simplified Chinese) can be used. Also, support is provided to automatically translate UTF-8 runes to code page encodings for languages that have fewer than 256 glyphs. This repository will not be maintained, at least for some unknown duration. But it is hoped that gofpdf has a bright future in the open source world. Due to Go’s promise of compatibility, gofpdf should continue to function without modification for a longer time than would be the case with many other languages. Forks should be based on the last viable commit. Tools such as active-forks can be used to select a fork that looks promising for your needs. If a particular fork looks like it has taken the lead in attracting followers, this README will be updated to point people in that direction. The efforts of all contributors to this project have been deeply appreciated. Best wishes to all of you. If you currently use the $GOPATH scheme, install the package with the following command. To test the installation, run The following Go code generates a simple PDF file. See the functions in the fpdf_test.go file (shown as examples in this documentation) for more advanced PDF examples. If an error occurs in an Fpdf method, an internal error field is set. After this occurs, Fpdf method calls typically return without performing any operations and the error state is retained. This error management scheme facilitates PDF generation since individual method calls do not need to be examined for failure; it is generally sufficient to wait until after Output() is called. For the same reason, if an error occurs in the calling application during PDF generation, it may be desirable for the application to transfer the error to the Fpdf instance by calling the SetError() method or the SetErrorf() method. At any time during the life cycle of the Fpdf instance, the error state can be determined with a call to Ok() or Err(). The error itself can be retrieved with a call to Error(). This package is a relatively straightforward translation from the original FPDF library written in PHP (despite the caveat in the introduction to Effective Go). The API names have been retained even though the Go idiom would suggest otherwise (for example, pdf.GetX() is used rather than simply pdf.X()). The similarity of the two libraries makes the original FPDF website a good source of information. It includes a forum and FAQ. However, some internal changes have been made. Page content is built up using buffers (of type bytes.Buffer) rather than repeated string concatenation. Errors are handled as explained above rather than panicking. Output is generated through an interface of type io.Writer or io.WriteCloser. A number of the original PHP methods behave differently based on the type of the arguments that are passed to them; in these cases additional methods have been exported to provide similar functionality. Font definition files are produced in JSON rather than PHP. A side effect of running go test ./... is the production of a number of example PDFs. These can be found in the gofpdf/pdf directory after the tests complete. Please note that these examples run in the context of a test. In order run an example as a standalone application, you’ll need to examine fpdf_test.go for some helper routines, for example exampleFilename() and summary(). Example PDFs can be compared with reference copies in order to verify that they have been generated as expected. This comparison will be performed if a PDF with the same name as the example PDF is placed in the gofpdf/pdf/reference directory and if the third argument to ComparePDFFiles() in internal/example/example.go is true. (By default it is false.) The routine that summarizes an example will look for this file and, if found, will call ComparePDFFiles() to check the example PDF for equality with its reference PDF. If differences exist between the two files they will be printed to standard output and the test will fail. If the reference file is missing, the comparison is considered to succeed. In order to successfully compare two PDFs, the placement of internal resources must be consistent and the internal creation timestamps must be the same. To do this, the methods SetCatalogSort() and SetCreationDate() need to be called for both files. This is done automatically for all examples. Nothing special is required to use the standard PDF fonts (courier, helvetica, times, zapfdingbats) in your documents other than calling SetFont(). You should use AddUTF8Font() or AddUTF8FontFromBytes() to add a TrueType UTF-8 encoded font. Use RTL() and LTR() methods switch between “right-to-left” and “left-to-right” mode. In order to use a different non-UTF-8 TrueType or Type1 font, you will need to generate a font definition file and, if the font will be embedded into PDFs, a compressed version of the font file. This is done by calling the MakeFont function or using the included makefont command line utility. To create the utility, cd into the makefont subdirectory and run “go build”. This will produce a standalone executable named makefont. Select the appropriate encoding file from the font subdirectory and run the command as in the following example. In your PDF generation code, call AddFont() to load the font and, as with the standard fonts, SetFont() to begin using it. Most examples, including the package example, demonstrate this method. Good sources of free, open-source fonts include Google Fonts and DejaVu Fonts. The draw2d package is a two dimensional vector graphics library that can generate output in different forms. It uses gofpdf for its document production mode. gofpdf is a global community effort and you are invited to make it even better. If you have implemented a new feature or corrected a problem, please consider contributing your change to the project. A contribution that does not directly pertain to the core functionality of gofpdf should be placed in its own directory directly beneath the contrib directory. Here are guidelines for making submissions. Your change should - be compatible with the MIT License - be properly documented - be formatted with go fmt - include an example in fpdf_test.go if appropriate - conform to the standards of golint and go vet, that is, golint . and go vet . should not generate any warnings - not diminish test coverage Pull requests are the preferred means of accepting your changes. gofpdf is released under the MIT License. It is copyrighted by Kurt Jung and the contributors acknowledged below. This package’s code and documentation are closely derived from the FPDF library created by Olivier Plathey, and a number of font and image resources are copied directly from it. Bruno Michel has provided valuable assistance with the code. Drawing support is adapted from the FPDF geometric figures script by David Hernández Sanz. Transparency support is adapted from the FPDF transparency script by Martin Hall-May. Support for gradients and clipping is adapted from FPDF scripts by Andreas Würmser. Support for outline bookmarks is adapted from Olivier Plathey by Manuel Cornes. Layer support is adapted from Olivier Plathey. Support for transformations is adapted from the FPDF transformation script by Moritz Wagner and Andreas Würmser. PDF protection is adapted from the work of Klemen Vodopivec for the FPDF product. Lawrence Kesteloot provided code to allow an image’s extent to be determined prior to placement. Support for vertical alignment within a cell was provided by Stefan Schroeder. Ivan Daniluk generalized the font and image loading code to use the Reader interface while maintaining backward compatibility. Anthony Starks provided code for the Polygon function. Robert Lillack provided the Beziergon function and corrected some naming issues with the internal curve function. Claudio Felber provided implementations for dashed line drawing and generalized font loading. Stani Michiels provided support for multi-segment path drawing with smooth line joins, line join styles, enhanced fill modes, and has helped greatly with package presentation and tests. Templating is adapted by Marcus Downing from the FPDF_Tpl library created by Jan Slabon and Setasign. Jelmer Snoeck contributed packages that generate a variety of barcodes and help with registering images on the web. Jelmer Snoek and Guillermo Pascual augmented the basic HTML functionality with aligned text. Kent Quirk implemented backwards-compatible support for reading DPI from images that support it, and for setting DPI manually and then having it properly taken into account when calculating image size. Paulo Coutinho provided support for static embedded fonts. Dan Meyers added support for embedded JavaScript. David Fish added a generic alias-replacement function to enable, among other things, table of contents functionality. Andy Bakun identified and corrected a problem in which the internal catalogs were not sorted stably. Paul Montag added encoding and decoding functionality for templates, including images that are embedded in templates; this allows templates to be stored independently of gofpdf. Paul also added support for page boxes used in printing PDF documents. Wojciech Matusiak added supported for word spacing. Artem Korotkiy added support of UTF-8 fonts. Dave Barnes added support for imported objects and templates. Brigham Thompson added support for rounded rectangles. Joe Westcott added underline functionality and optimized image storage. Benoit KUGLER contributed support for rectangles with corners of unequal radius, modification times, and for file attachments and annotations. - Remove all legacy code page font support; use UTF-8 exclusively - Improve test coverage as reported by the coverage tool. Example demonstrates the generation of a simple PDF document. Note that since only core fonts are used (in this case Arial, a synonym for Helvetica), an empty string can be specified for the font directory in the call to New(). Note also that the example.Filename() and example.Summary() functions belong to a separate, internal package and are not part of the gofpdf library. If an error occurs at some point during the construction of the document, subsequent method calls exit immediately and the error is finally retrieved with the output call where it can be handled by the application.

Package gofpdf implements a PDF document generator with high level support for text, drawing and images. • Choice of measurement unit, page format and margins • Page header and footer management • Automatic page breaks, line breaks, and text justification • Inclusion of JPEG, PNG, GIF, TIFF and basic path-only SVG images • Colors, gradients and alpha channel transparency • Outline bookmarks • Internal and external links • TrueType, Type1 and encoding support • Page compression • Lines, Bézier curves, arcs, and ellipses • Rotation, scaling, skewing, translation, and mirroring • Clipping • Document protection • Layers • Templates • Barcodes gofpdf has no dependencies other than the Go standard library. All tests pass on Linux, Mac and Windows platforms. Like FPDF version 1.7, from which gofpdf is derived, this package does not yet support UTF-8 fonts. In particular, languages that require more than one code page such as Chinese, Japanese, and Arabic are not currently supported. This is explained in issue 109. However, support is provided to automatically translate UTF-8 runes to code page encodings for languages that have fewer than 256 glyphs. To install the package on your system, run Later, to receive updates, run The following Go code generates a simple PDF file. See the functions in the fpdf_test.go file (shown as examples in this documentation) for more advanced PDF examples. If an error occurs in an Fpdf method, an internal error field is set. After this occurs, Fpdf method calls typically return without performing any operations and the error state is retained. This error management scheme facilitates PDF generation since individual method calls do not need to be examined for failure; it is generally sufficient to wait until after Output() is called. For the same reason, if an error occurs in the calling application during PDF generation, it may be desirable for the application to transfer the error to the Fpdf instance by calling the SetError() method or the SetErrorf() method. At any time during the life cycle of the Fpdf instance, the error state can be determined with a call to Ok() or Err(). The error itself can be retrieved with a call to Error(). This package is a relatively straightforward translation from the original FPDF library written in PHP (despite the caveat in the introduction to Effective Go). The API names have been retained even though the Go idiom would suggest otherwise (for example, pdf.GetX() is used rather than simply pdf.X()). The similarity of the two libraries makes the original FPDF website a good source of information. It includes a forum and FAQ. However, some internal changes have been made. Page content is built up using buffers (of type bytes.Buffer) rather than repeated string concatenation. Errors are handled as explained above rather than panicking. Output is generated through an interface of type io.Writer or io.WriteCloser. A number of the original PHP methods behave differently based on the type of the arguments that are passed to them; in these cases additional methods have been exported to provide similar functionality. Font definition files are produced in JSON rather than PHP. A side effect of running "go test ./..." is the production of a number of example PDFs. These can be found in the gofpdf/pdf directory after the tests complete. Please note that these examples run in the context of a test. In order run an example as a standalone application, you'll need to examine fpdf_test.go for some helper routines, for example exampleFilename() and summary(). Example PDFs can be compared with reference copies in order to verify that they have been generated as expected. This comparison will be performed if a PDF with the same name as the example PDF is placed in the gofpdf/pdf/reference directory. The routine that summarizes an example will look for this file and, if found, will call ComparePDFFiles() to check the example PDF for equality with its reference PDF. If differences exist between the two files they will be printed to standard output and the test will fail. If the reference file is missing, the comparison is considered to succeed. In order to successfully compare two PDFs, the placement of internal resources must be consistent and the internal creation timestamps must be the same. To do this, the methods SetCatalogSort() and SetCreationDate() need to be called for both files. This is done automatically for all examples. Nothing special is required to use the standard PDF fonts (courier, helvetica, times, zapfdingbats) in your documents other than calling SetFont(). In order to use a different TrueType or Type1 font, you will need to generate a font definition file and, if the font will be embedded into PDFs, a compressed version of the font file. This is done by calling the MakeFont function or using the included makefont command line utility. To create the utility, cd into the makefont subdirectory and run "go build". This will produce a standalone executable named makefont. Select the appropriate encoding file from the font subdirectory and run the command as in the following example. In your PDF generation code, call AddFont() to load the font and, as with the standard fonts, SetFont() to begin using it. Most examples, including the package example, demonstrate this method. Good sources of free, open-source fonts include http://www.google.com/fonts/ and http://dejavu-fonts.org/. The draw2d package (https://github.com/llgcode/draw2d) is a two dimensional vector graphics library that can generate output in different forms. It uses gofpdf for its document production mode. gofpdf is a global community effort and you are invited to make it even better. If you have implemented a new feature or corrected a problem, please consider contributing your change to the project. A contribution that does not directly pertain to the core functionality of gofpdf should be placed in its own directory directly beneath the `contrib` directory. Here are guidelines for making submissions. Your change should • be compatible with the MIT License • be properly documented • be formatted with `go fmt` • include an example in fpdf_test.go if appropriate • conform to the standards of golint (https://github.com/golang/lint) and go vet (https://godoc.org/golang.org/x/tools/cmd/vet), that is, `golint .` and `go vet .` should not generate any warnings • not diminish test coverage (https://blog.golang.org/cover) Pull requests (https://help.github.com/articles/using-pull-requests/) work nicely as a means of contributing your changes. gofpdf is released under the MIT License. It is copyrighted by Kurt Jung and the contributors acknowledged below. This package's code and documentation are closely derived from the FPDF library (http://www.fpdf.org/) created by Olivier Plathey, and a number of font and image resources are copied directly from it. Drawing support is adapted from the FPDF geometric figures script by David Hernández Sanz. Transparency support is adapted from the FPDF transparency script by Martin Hall-May. Support for gradients and clipping is adapted from FPDF scripts by Andreas Würmser. Support for outline bookmarks is adapted from Olivier Plathey by Manuel Cornes. Layer support is adapted from Olivier Plathey. Support for transformations is adapted from the FPDF transformation script by Moritz Wagner and Andreas Würmser. PDF protection is adapted from the work of Klemen Vodopivec for the FPDF product. Lawrence Kesteloot provided code to allow an image's extent to be determined prior to placement. Support for vertical alignment within a cell was provided by Stefan Schroeder. Ivan Daniluk generalized the font and image loading code to use the Reader interface while maintaining backward compatibility. Anthony Starks provided code for the Polygon function. Robert Lillack provided the Beziergon function and corrected some naming issues with the internal curve function. Claudio Felber provided implementations for dashed line drawing and generalized font loading. Stani Michiels provided support for multi-segment path drawing with smooth line joins, line join styles, enhanced fill modes, and has helped greatly with package presentation and tests. Templating is adapted by Marcus Downing from the FPDF_Tpl library created by Jan Slabon and Setasign. Jelmer Snoeck contributed packages that generate a variety of barcodes and help with registering images on the web. Jelmer Snoek and Guillermo Pascual augmented the basic HTML functionality with aligned text. Kent Quirk implemented backwards-compatible support for reading DPI from images that support it, and for setting DPI manually and then having it properly taken into account when calculating image size. Paulo Coutinho provided support for static embedded fonts. Bruno Michel has provided valuable assistance with the code. • Handle UTF-8 source text natively. Until then, automatic translation of UTF-8 runes to code page bytes is provided. • Improve test coverage as reported by the coverage tool. This example demonstrates the generation of a simple PDF document. Note that since only core fonts are used (in this case Arial, a synonym for Helvetica), an empty string can be specified for the font directory in the call to New(). Note also that the example.Filename() and example.Summary() functions belong to a separate, internal package and are not part of the gofpdf library. If an error occurs at some point during the construction of the document, subsequent method calls exit immediately and the error is finally retrieved with the output call where it can be handled by the application.

Package gofpdf implements a PDF document generator with high level support for text, drawing and images. - UTF-8 support - Choice of measurement unit, page format and margins - Page header and footer management - Automatic page breaks, line breaks, and text justification - Inclusion of JPEG, PNG, GIF, TIFF and basic path-only SVG images - Colors, gradients and alpha channel transparency - Outline bookmarks - Internal and external links - TrueType, Type1 and encoding support - Page compression - Lines, Bézier curves, arcs, and ellipses - Rotation, scaling, skewing, translation, and mirroring - Clipping - Document protection - Layers - Templates - Barcodes - Charting facility - Import PDFs as templates gofpdf has no dependencies other than the Go standard library. All tests pass on Linux, Mac and Windows platforms. gofpdf supports UTF-8 TrueType fonts and “right-to-left” languages. Note that Chinese, Japanese, and Korean characters may not be included in many general purpose fonts. For these languages, a specialized font (for example, NotoSansSC for simplified Chinese) can be used. Also, support is provided to automatically translate UTF-8 runes to code page encodings for languages that have fewer than 256 glyphs. This repository will not be maintained, at least for some unknown duration. But it is hoped that gofpdf has a bright future in the open source world. Due to Go’s promise of compatibility, gofpdf should continue to function without modification for a longer time than would be the case with many other languages. Forks should be based on the last viable commit. Tools such as active-forks can be used to select a fork that looks promising for your needs. If a particular fork looks like it has taken the lead in attracting followers, this README will be updated to point people in that direction. The efforts of all contributors to this project have been deeply appreciated. Best wishes to all of you. To install the package on your system, run Later, to receive updates, run The following Go code generates a simple PDF file. See the functions in the fpdf_test.go file (shown as examples in this documentation) for more advanced PDF examples. If an error occurs in an Fpdf method, an internal error field is set. After this occurs, Fpdf method calls typically return without performing any operations and the error state is retained. This error management scheme facilitates PDF generation since individual method calls do not need to be examined for failure; it is generally sufficient to wait until after Output() is called. For the same reason, if an error occurs in the calling application during PDF generation, it may be desirable for the application to transfer the error to the Fpdf instance by calling the SetError() method or the SetErrorf() method. At any time during the life cycle of the Fpdf instance, the error state can be determined with a call to Ok() or Err(). The error itself can be retrieved with a call to Error(). This package is a relatively straightforward translation from the original FPDF library written in PHP (despite the caveat in the introduction to Effective Go). The API names have been retained even though the Go idiom would suggest otherwise (for example, pdf.GetX() is used rather than simply pdf.X()). The similarity of the two libraries makes the original FPDF website a good source of information. It includes a forum and FAQ. However, some internal changes have been made. Page content is built up using buffers (of type bytes.Buffer) rather than repeated string concatenation. Errors are handled as explained above rather than panicking. Output is generated through an interface of type io.Writer or io.WriteCloser. A number of the original PHP methods behave differently based on the type of the arguments that are passed to them; in these cases additional methods have been exported to provide similar functionality. Font definition files are produced in JSON rather than PHP. A side effect of running go test ./... is the production of a number of example PDFs. These can be found in the gofpdf/pdf directory after the tests complete. Please note that these examples run in the context of a test. In order run an example as a standalone application, you’ll need to examine fpdf_test.go for some helper routines, for example exampleFilename() and summary(). Example PDFs can be compared with reference copies in order to verify that they have been generated as expected. This comparison will be performed if a PDF with the same name as the example PDF is placed in the gofpdf/pdf/reference directory and if the third argument to ComparePDFFiles() in internal/example/example.go is true. (By default it is false.) The routine that summarizes an example will look for this file and, if found, will call ComparePDFFiles() to check the example PDF for equality with its reference PDF. If differences exist between the two files they will be printed to standard output and the test will fail. If the reference file is missing, the comparison is considered to succeed. In order to successfully compare two PDFs, the placement of internal resources must be consistent and the internal creation timestamps must be the same. To do this, the methods SetCatalogSort() and SetCreationDate() need to be called for both files. This is done automatically for all examples. Nothing special is required to use the standard PDF fonts (courier, helvetica, times, zapfdingbats) in your documents other than calling SetFont(). You should use AddUTF8Font() or AddUTF8FontFromBytes() to add a TrueType UTF-8 encoded font. Use RTL() and LTR() methods switch between “right-to-left” and “left-to-right” mode. In order to use a different non-UTF-8 TrueType or Type1 font, you will need to generate a font definition file and, if the font will be embedded into PDFs, a compressed version of the font file. This is done by calling the MakeFont function or using the included makefont command line utility. To create the utility, cd into the makefont subdirectory and run “go build”. This will produce a standalone executable named makefont. Select the appropriate encoding file from the font subdirectory and run the command as in the following example. In your PDF generation code, call AddFont() to load the font and, as with the standard fonts, SetFont() to begin using it. Most examples, including the package example, demonstrate this method. Good sources of free, open-source fonts include Google Fonts and DejaVu Fonts. The draw2d package is a two dimensional vector graphics library that can generate output in different forms. It uses gofpdf for its document production mode. gofpdf is a global community effort and you are invited to make it even better. If you have implemented a new feature or corrected a problem, please consider contributing your change to the project. A contribution that does not directly pertain to the core functionality of gofpdf should be placed in its own directory directly beneath the contrib directory. Here are guidelines for making submissions. Your change should - be compatible with the MIT License - be properly documented - be formatted with go fmt - include an example in fpdf_test.go if appropriate - conform to the standards of golint and go vet, that is, golint . and go vet . should not generate any warnings - not diminish test coverage Pull requests are the preferred means of accepting your changes. gofpdf is released under the MIT License. It is copyrighted by Kurt Jung and the contributors acknowledged below. This package’s code and documentation are closely derived from the FPDF library created by Olivier Plathey, and a number of font and image resources are copied directly from it. Bruno Michel has provided valuable assistance with the code. Drawing support is adapted from the FPDF geometric figures script by David Hernández Sanz. Transparency support is adapted from the FPDF transparency script by Martin Hall-May. Support for gradients and clipping is adapted from FPDF scripts by Andreas Würmser. Support for outline bookmarks is adapted from Olivier Plathey by Manuel Cornes. Layer support is adapted from Olivier Plathey. Support for transformations is adapted from the FPDF transformation script by Moritz Wagner and Andreas Würmser. PDF protection is adapted from the work of Klemen Vodopivec for the FPDF product. Lawrence Kesteloot provided code to allow an image’s extent to be determined prior to placement. Support for vertical alignment within a cell was provided by Stefan Schroeder. Ivan Daniluk generalized the font and image loading code to use the Reader interface while maintaining backward compatibility. Anthony Starks provided code for the Polygon function. Robert Lillack provided the Beziergon function and corrected some naming issues with the internal curve function. Claudio Felber provided implementations for dashed line drawing and generalized font loading. Stani Michiels provided support for multi-segment path drawing with smooth line joins, line join styles, enhanced fill modes, and has helped greatly with package presentation and tests. Templating is adapted by Marcus Downing from the FPDF_Tpl library created by Jan Slabon and Setasign. Jelmer Snoeck contributed packages that generate a variety of barcodes and help with registering images on the web. Jelmer Snoek and Guillermo Pascual augmented the basic HTML functionality with aligned text. Kent Quirk implemented backwards-compatible support for reading DPI from images that support it, and for setting DPI manually and then having it properly taken into account when calculating image size. Paulo Coutinho provided support for static embedded fonts. Dan Meyers added support for embedded JavaScript. David Fish added a generic alias-replacement function to enable, among other things, table of contents functionality. Andy Bakun identified and corrected a problem in which the internal catalogs were not sorted stably. Paul Montag added encoding and decoding functionality for templates, including images that are embedded in templates; this allows templates to be stored independently of gofpdf. Paul also added support for page boxes used in printing PDF documents. Wojciech Matusiak added supported for word spacing. Artem Korotkiy added support of UTF-8 fonts. Dave Barnes added support for imported objects and templates. Brigham Thompson added support for rounded rectangles. Joe Westcott added underline functionality and optimized image storage. Benoit KUGLER contributed support for rectangles with corners of unequal radius, modification times, and for file attachments and annotations. - Remove all legacy code page font support; use UTF-8 exclusively - Improve test coverage as reported by the coverage tool. Example demonstrates the generation of a simple PDF document. Note that since only core fonts are used (in this case Arial, a synonym for Helvetica), an empty string can be specified for the font directory in the call to New(). Note also that the example.Filename() and example.Summary() functions belong to a separate, internal package and are not part of the gofpdf library. If an error occurs at some point during the construction of the document, subsequent method calls exit immediately and the error is finally retrieved with the output call where it can be handled by the application.

Package gofpdf implements a PDF document generator with high level support for text, drawing and images. • Choice of measurement unit, page format and margins • Page header and footer management • Automatic page breaks, line breaks, and text justification • Inclusion of JPEG, PNG, GIF, TIFF and basic path-only SVG images • Colors, gradients and alpha channel transparency • Outline bookmarks • Internal and external links • TrueType, Type1 and encoding support • Page compression • Lines, Bézier curves, arcs, and ellipses • Rotation, scaling, skewing, translation, and mirroring • Clipping • Document protection • Layers • Templates • Barcodes gofpdf has no dependencies other than the Go standard library. All tests pass on Linux, Mac and Windows platforms. Like FPDF version 1.7, from which gofpdf is derived, this package does not yet support UTF-8 fonts. In particular, languages that require more than one code page such as Chinese, Japanese, and Arabic are not currently supported. This is explained in issue 109. However, support is provided to automatically translate UTF-8 runes to code page encodings for languages that have fewer than 256 glyphs. To install the package on your system, run Later, to receive updates, run The following Go code generates a simple PDF file. See the functions in the fpdf_test.go file (shown as examples in this documentation) for more advanced PDF examples. If an error occurs in an Fpdf method, an internal error field is set. After this occurs, Fpdf method calls typically return without performing any operations and the error state is retained. This error management scheme facilitates PDF generation since individual method calls do not need to be examined for failure; it is generally sufficient to wait until after Output() is called. For the same reason, if an error occurs in the calling application during PDF generation, it may be desirable for the application to transfer the error to the Fpdf instance by calling the SetError() method or the SetErrorf() method. At any time during the life cycle of the Fpdf instance, the error state can be determined with a call to Ok() or Err(). The error itself can be retrieved with a call to Error(). This package is a relatively straightforward translation from the original FPDF library written in PHP (despite the caveat in the introduction to Effective Go). The API names have been retained even though the Go idiom would suggest otherwise (for example, pdf.GetX() is used rather than simply pdf.X()). The similarity of the two libraries makes the original FPDF website a good source of information. It includes a forum and FAQ. However, some internal changes have been made. Page content is built up using buffers (of type bytes.Buffer) rather than repeated string concatenation. Errors are handled as explained above rather than panicking. Output is generated through an interface of type io.Writer or io.WriteCloser. A number of the original PHP methods behave differently based on the type of the arguments that are passed to them; in these cases additional methods have been exported to provide similar functionality. Font definition files are produced in JSON rather than PHP. A side effect of running "go test ./..." is the production of a number of example PDFs. These can be found in the gofpdf/pdf directory after the tests complete. Please note that these examples run in the context of a test. In order run an example as a standalone application, you'll need to examine fpdf_test.go for some helper routines, for example exampleFilename() and summary(). Example PDFs can be compared with reference copies in order to verify that they have been generated as expected. This comparison will be performed if a PDF with the same name as the example PDF is placed in the gofpdf/pdf/reference directory. The routine that summarizes an example will look for this file and, if found, will call ComparePDFFiles() to check the example PDF for equality with its reference PDF. If differences exist between the two files they will be printed to standard output and the test will fail. If the reference file is missing, the comparison is considered to succeed. In order to successfully compare two PDFs, the placement of internal resources must be consistent and the internal creation timestamps must be the same. To do this, the methods SetCatalogSort() and SetCreationDate() need to be called for both files. This is done automatically for all examples. Nothing special is required to use the standard PDF fonts (courier, helvetica, times, zapfdingbats) in your documents other than calling SetFont(). In order to use a different TrueType or Type1 font, you will need to generate a font definition file and, if the font will be embedded into PDFs, a compressed version of the font file. This is done by calling the MakeFont function or using the included makefont command line utility. To create the utility, cd into the makefont subdirectory and run "go build". This will produce a standalone executable named makefont. Select the appropriate encoding file from the font subdirectory and run the command as in the following example. In your PDF generation code, call AddFont() to load the font and, as with the standard fonts, SetFont() to begin using it. Most examples, including the package example, demonstrate this method. Good sources of free, open-source fonts include http://www.google.com/fonts/ and http://dejavu-fonts.org/. The draw2d package (https://github.com/llgcode/draw2d) is a two dimensional vector graphics library that can generate output in different forms. It uses gofpdf for its document production mode. gofpdf is a global community effort and you are invited to make it even better. If you have implemented a new feature or corrected a problem, please consider contributing your change to the project. A contribution that does not directly pertain to the core functionality of gofpdf should be placed in its own directory directly beneath the `contrib` directory. Here are guidelines for making submissions. Your change should • be compatible with the MIT License • be properly documented • be formatted with `go fmt` • include an example in fpdf_test.go if appropriate • conform to the standards of golint (https://github.com/golang/lint) and go vet (https://godoc.org/golang.org/x/tools/cmd/vet), that is, `golint .` and `go vet .` should not generate any warnings • not diminish test coverage (https://blog.golang.org/cover) Pull requests (https://help.github.com/articles/using-pull-requests/) work nicely as a means of contributing your changes. gofpdf is released under the MIT License. It is copyrighted by Kurt Jung and the contributors acknowledged below. This package's code and documentation are closely derived from the FPDF library (http://www.fpdf.org/) created by Olivier Plathey, and a number of font and image resources are copied directly from it. Drawing support is adapted from the FPDF geometric figures script by David Hernández Sanz. Transparency support is adapted from the FPDF transparency script by Martin Hall-May. Support for gradients and clipping is adapted from FPDF scripts by Andreas Würmser. Support for outline bookmarks is adapted from Olivier Plathey by Manuel Cornes. Layer support is adapted from Olivier Plathey. Support for transformations is adapted from the FPDF transformation script by Moritz Wagner and Andreas Würmser. PDF protection is adapted from the work of Klemen Vodopivec for the FPDF product. Lawrence Kesteloot provided code to allow an image's extent to be determined prior to placement. Support for vertical alignment within a cell was provided by Stefan Schroeder. Ivan Daniluk generalized the font and image loading code to use the Reader interface while maintaining backward compatibility. Anthony Starks provided code for the Polygon function. Robert Lillack provided the Beziergon function and corrected some naming issues with the internal curve function. Claudio Felber provided implementations for dashed line drawing and generalized font loading. Stani Michiels provided support for multi-segment path drawing with smooth line joins, line join styles, enhanced fill modes, and has helped greatly with package presentation and tests. Templating is adapted by Marcus Downing from the FPDF_Tpl library created by Jan Slabon and Setasign. Jelmer Snoeck contributed packages that generate a variety of barcodes and help with registering images on the web. Jelmer Snoek and Guillermo Pascual augmented the basic HTML functionality with aligned text. Kent Quirk implemented backwards-compatible support for reading DPI from images that support it, and for setting DPI manually and then having it properly taken into account when calculating image size. Paulo Coutinho provided support for static embedded fonts. Bruno Michel has provided valuable assistance with the code. • Handle UTF-8 source text natively. Until then, automatic translation of UTF-8 runes to code page bytes is provided. • Improve test coverage as reported by the coverage tool. This example demonstrates the generation of a simple PDF document. Note that since only core fonts are used (in this case Arial, a synonym for Helvetica), an empty string can be specified for the font directory in the call to New(). Note also that the example.Filename() and example.Summary() functions belong to a separate, internal package and are not part of the gofpdf library. If an error occurs at some point during the construction of the document, subsequent method calls exit immediately and the error is finally retrieved with the output call where it can be handled by the application.

Package ql implements a pure Go embedded SQL database engine. QL is a member of the SQL family of languages. It is less complex and less powerful than SQL (whichever specification SQL is considered to be). 2017-01-10: Release v1.1.0 fixes some bugs and adds a configurable WAL headroom. 2016-07-29: Release v1.0.6 enables alternatively using = instead of == for equality operation. 2016-07-11: Release v1.0.5 undoes vendoring of lldb. QL now uses stable lldb (github.com/cznic/lldb). 2016-07-06: Release v1.0.4 fixes a panic when closing the WAL file. 2016-04-03: Release v1.0.3 fixes a data race. 2016-03-23: Release v1.0.2 vendors github.com/cznic/exp/lldb and github.com/camlistore/go4/lock. 2016-03-17: Release v1.0.1 adjusts for latest goyacc. Parser error messages are improved and changed, but their exact form is not considered a API change. 2016-03-05: The current version has been tagged v1.0.0. 2015-06-15: To improve compatibility with other SQL implementations, the count built-in aggregate function now accepts * as its argument. 2015-05-29: The execution planner was rewritten from scratch. It should use indices in all places where they were used before plus in some additional situations. It is possible to investigate the plan using the newly added EXPLAIN statement. The QL tool is handy for such analysis. If the planner would have used an index, but no such exists, the plan includes hints in form of copy/paste ready CREATE INDEX statements. The planner is still quite simple and a lot of work on it is yet ahead. You can help this process by filling an issue with a schema and query which fails to use an index or indices when it should, in your opinion. Bonus points for including output of `ql 'explain <query>'`. 2015-05-09: The grammar of the CREATE INDEX statement now accepts an expression list instead of a single expression, which was further limited to just a column name or the built-in id(). As a side effect, composite indices are now functional. However, the values in the expression-list style index are not yet used by other statements or the statement/query planner. The composite index is useful while having UNIQUE clause to check for semantically duplicate rows before they get added to the table or when such a row is mutated using the UPDATE statement and the expression-list style index tuple of the row is thus recomputed. 2015-05-02: The Schema field of table __Table now correctly reflects any column constraints and/or defaults. Also, the (*DB).Info method now has that information provided in new ColumInfo fields NotNull, Constraint and Default. 2015-04-20: Added support for {LEFT,RIGHT,FULL} [OUTER] JOIN. 2015-04-18: Column definitions can now have constraints and defaults. Details are discussed in the "Constraints and defaults" chapter below the CREATE TABLE statement documentation. 2015-03-06: New built-in functions formatFloat and formatInt. Thanks urandom! (https://github.com/urandom) 2015-02-16: IN predicate now accepts a SELECT statement. See the updated "Predicates" section. 2015-01-17: Logical operators || and && have now alternative spellings: OR and AND (case insensitive). AND was a keyword before, but OR is a new one. This can possibly break existing queries. For the record, it's a good idea to not use any name appearing in, for example, [7] in your queries as the list of QL's keywords may expand for gaining better compatibility with existing SQL "standards". 2015-01-12: ACID guarantees were tightened at the cost of performance in some cases. The write collecting window mechanism, a formerly used implementation detail, was removed. Inserting rows one by one in a transaction is now slow. I mean very slow. Try to avoid inserting single rows in a transaction. Instead, whenever possible, perform batch updates of tens to, say thousands of rows in a single transaction. See also: http://www.sqlite.org/faq.html#q19, the discussed synchronization principles involved are the same as for QL, modulo minor details. Note: A side effect is that closing a DB before exiting an application, both for the Go API and through database/sql driver, is no more required, strictly speaking. Beware that exiting an application while there is an open (uncommitted) transaction in progress means losing the transaction data. However, the DB will not become corrupted because of not closing it. Nor that was the case before, but formerly failing to close a DB could have resulted in losing the data of the last transaction. 2014-09-21: id() now optionally accepts a single argument - a table name. 2014-09-01: Added the DB.Flush() method and the LIKE pattern matching predicate. 2014-08-08: The built in functions max and min now accept also time values. Thanks opennota! (https://github.com/opennota) 2014-06-05: RecordSet interface extended by new methods FirstRow and Rows. 2014-06-02: Indices on id() are now used by SELECT statements. 2014-05-07: Introduction of Marshal, Schema, Unmarshal. 2014-04-15: Added optional IF NOT EXISTS clause to CREATE INDEX and optional IF EXISTS clause to DROP INDEX. 2014-04-12: The column Unique in the virtual table __Index was renamed to IsUnique because the old name is a keyword. Unfortunately, this is a breaking change, sorry. 2014-04-11: Introduction of LIMIT, OFFSET. 2014-04-10: Introduction of query rewriting. 2014-04-07: Introduction of indices. QL imports zappy[8], a block-based compressor, which speeds up its performance by using a C version of the compression/decompression algorithms. If a CGO-free (pure Go) version of QL, or an app using QL, is required, please include 'purego' in the -tags option of go {build,get,install}. For example: If zappy was installed before installing QL, it might be necessary to rebuild zappy first (or rebuild QL with all its dependencies using the -a option): The syntax is specified using Extended Backus-Naur Form (EBNF) Lower-case production names are used to identify lexical tokens. Non-terminals are in CamelCase. Lexical tokens are enclosed in double quotes "" or back quotes “. The form a … b represents the set of characters from a through b as alternatives. The horizontal ellipsis … is also used elsewhere in the spec to informally denote various enumerations or code snippets that are not further specified. QL source code is Unicode text encoded in UTF-8. The text is not canonicalized, so a single accented code point is distinct from the same character constructed from combining an accent and a letter; those are treated as two code points. For simplicity, this document will use the unqualified term character to refer to a Unicode code point in the source text. Each code point is distinct; for instance, upper and lower case letters are different characters. Implementation restriction: For compatibility with other tools, the parser may disallow the NUL character (U+0000) in the statement. Implementation restriction: A byte order mark is disallowed anywhere in QL statements. The following terms are used to denote specific character classes The underscore character _ (U+005F) is considered a letter. Lexical elements are comments, tokens, identifiers, keywords, operators and delimiters, integer, floating-point, imaginary, rune and string literals and QL parameters. Line comments start with the character sequence // or -- and stop at the end of the line. A line comment acts like a space. General comments start with the character sequence /* and continue through the character sequence */. A general comment acts like a space. Comments do not nest. Tokens form the vocabulary of QL. There are four classes: identifiers, keywords, operators and delimiters, and literals. White space, formed from spaces (U+0020), horizontal tabs (U+0009), carriage returns (U+000D), and newlines (U+000A), is ignored except as it separates tokens that would otherwise combine into a single token. The formal grammar uses semicolons ";" as separators of QL statements. A single QL statement or the last QL statement in a list of statements can have an optional semicolon terminator. (Actually a separator from the following empty statement.) Identifiers name entities such as tables or record set columns. An identifier is a sequence of one or more letters and digits. The first character in an identifier must be a letter. For example No identifiers are predeclared, however note that no keyword can be used as an identifier. Identifiers starting with two underscores are used for meta data virtual tables names. For forward compatibility, users should generally avoid using any identifiers starting with two underscores. For example The following keywords are reserved and may not be used as identifiers. Keywords are not case sensitive. The following character sequences represent operators, delimiters, and other special tokens Operators consisting of more than one character are referred to by names in the rest of the documentation An integer literal is a sequence of digits representing an integer constant. An optional prefix sets a non-decimal base: 0 for octal, 0x or 0X for hexadecimal. In hexadecimal literals, letters a-f and A-F represent values 10 through 15. For example A floating-point literal is a decimal representation of a floating-point constant. It has an integer part, a decimal point, a fractional part, and an exponent part. The integer and fractional part comprise decimal digits; the exponent part is an e or E followed by an optionally signed decimal exponent. One of the integer part or the fractional part may be elided; one of the decimal point or the exponent may be elided. For example An imaginary literal is a decimal representation of the imaginary part of a complex constant. It consists of a floating-point literal or decimal integer followed by the lower-case letter i. For example A rune literal represents a rune constant, an integer value identifying a Unicode code point. A rune literal is expressed as one or more characters enclosed in single quotes. Within the quotes, any character may appear except single quote and newline. A single quoted character represents the Unicode value of the character itself, while multi-character sequences beginning with a backslash encode values in various formats. The simplest form represents the single character within the quotes; since QL statements are Unicode characters encoded in UTF-8, multiple UTF-8-encoded bytes may represent a single integer value. For instance, the literal 'a' holds a single byte representing a literal a, Unicode U+0061, value 0x61, while 'ä' holds two bytes (0xc3 0xa4) representing a literal a-dieresis, U+00E4, value 0xe4. Several backslash escapes allow arbitrary values to be encoded as ASCII text. There are four ways to represent the integer value as a numeric constant: \x followed by exactly two hexadecimal digits; \u followed by exactly four hexadecimal digits; \U followed by exactly eight hexadecimal digits, and a plain backslash \ followed by exactly three octal digits. In each case the value of the literal is the value represented by the digits in the corresponding base. Although these representations all result in an integer, they have different valid ranges. Octal escapes must represent a value between 0 and 255 inclusive. Hexadecimal escapes satisfy this condition by construction. The escapes \u and \U represent Unicode code points so within them some values are illegal, in particular those above 0x10FFFF and surrogate halves. After a backslash, certain single-character escapes represent special values All other sequences starting with a backslash are illegal inside rune literals. For example A string literal represents a string constant obtained from concatenating a sequence of characters. There are two forms: raw string literals and interpreted string literals. Raw string literals are character sequences between back quotes “. Within the quotes, any character is legal except back quote. The value of a raw string literal is the string composed of the uninterpreted (implicitly UTF-8-encoded) characters between the quotes; in particular, backslashes have no special meaning and the string may contain newlines. Carriage returns inside raw string literals are discarded from the raw string value. Interpreted string literals are character sequences between double quotes "". The text between the quotes, which may not contain newlines, forms the value of the literal, with backslash escapes interpreted as they are in rune literals (except that \' is illegal and \" is legal), with the same restrictions. The three-digit octal (\nnn) and two-digit hexadecimal (\xnn) escapes represent individual bytes of the resulting string; all other escapes represent the (possibly multi-byte) UTF-8 encoding of individual characters. Thus inside a string literal \377 and \xFF represent a single byte of value 0xFF=255, while ÿ, \u00FF, \U000000FF and \xc3\xbf represent the two bytes 0xc3 0xbf of the UTF-8 encoding of character U+00FF. For example These examples all represent the same string If the statement source represents a character as two code points, such as a combining form involving an accent and a letter, the result will be an error if placed in a rune literal (it is not a single code point), and will appear as two code points if placed in a string literal. Literals are assigned their values from the respective text representation at "compile" (parse) time. QL parameters provide the same functionality as literals, but their value is assigned at execution time from an expression list passed to DB.Run or DB.Execute. Using '?' or '$' is completely equivalent. For example Keywords 'false' and 'true' (not case sensitive) represent the two possible constant values of type bool (also not case sensitive). Keyword 'NULL' (not case sensitive) represents an untyped constant which is assignable to any type. NULL is distinct from any other value of any type. A type determines the set of values and operations specific to values of that type. A type is specified by a type name. Named instances of the boolean, numeric, and string types are keywords. The names are not case sensitive. Note: The blob type is exchanged between the back end and the API as []byte. On 32 bit platforms this limits the size which the implementation can handle to 2G. A boolean type represents the set of Boolean truth values denoted by the predeclared constants true and false. The predeclared boolean type is bool. A duration type represents the elapsed time between two instants as an int64 nanosecond count. The representation limits the largest representable duration to approximately 290 years. A numeric type represents sets of integer or floating-point values. The predeclared architecture-independent numeric types are The value of an n-bit integer is n bits wide and represented using two's complement arithmetic. Conversions are required when different numeric types are mixed in an expression or assignment. A string type represents the set of string values. A string value is a (possibly empty) sequence of bytes. The case insensitive keyword for the string type is 'string'. The length of a string (its size in bytes) can be discovered using the built-in function len. A time type represents an instant in time with nanosecond precision. Each time has associated with it a location, consulted when computing the presentation form of the time. The following functions are implicitly declared An expression specifies the computation of a value by applying operators and functions to operands. Operands denote the elementary values in an expression. An operand may be a literal, a (possibly qualified) identifier denoting a constant or a function or a table/record set column, or a parenthesized expression. A qualified identifier is an identifier qualified with a table/record set name prefix. For example Primary expression are the operands for unary and binary expressions. For example A primary expression of the form denotes the element of a string indexed by x. Its type is byte. The value x is called the index. The following rules apply - The index x must be of integer type except bigint or duration; it is in range if 0 <= x < len(s), otherwise it is out of range. - A constant index must be non-negative and representable by a value of type int. - A constant index must be in range if the string a is a literal. - If x is out of range at run time, a run-time error occurs. - s[x] is the byte at index x and the type of s[x] is byte. If s is NULL or x is NULL then the result is NULL. Otherwise s[x] is illegal. For a string, the primary expression constructs a substring. The indices low and high select which elements appear in the result. The result has indices starting at 0 and length equal to high - low. For convenience, any of the indices may be omitted. A missing low index defaults to zero; a missing high index defaults to the length of the sliced operand The indices low and high are in range if 0 <= low <= high <= len(a), otherwise they are out of range. A constant index must be non-negative and representable by a value of type int. If both indices are constant, they must satisfy low <= high. If the indices are out of range at run time, a run-time error occurs. Integer values of type bigint or duration cannot be used as indices. If s is NULL the result is NULL. If low or high is not omitted and is NULL then the result is NULL. Given an identifier f denoting a predeclared function, calls f with arguments a1, a2, … an. Arguments are evaluated before the function is called. The type of the expression is the result type of f. In a function call, the function value and arguments are evaluated in the usual order. After they are evaluated, the parameters of the call are passed by value to the function and the called function begins execution. The return value of the function is passed by value when the function returns. Calling an undefined function causes a compile-time error. Operators combine operands into expressions. Comparisons are discussed elsewhere. For other binary operators, the operand types must be identical unless the operation involves shifts or untyped constants. For operations involving constants only, see the section on constant expressions. Except for shift operations, if one operand is an untyped constant and the other operand is not, the constant is converted to the type of the other operand. The right operand in a shift expression must have unsigned integer type or be an untyped constant that can be converted to unsigned integer type. If the left operand of a non-constant shift expression is an untyped constant, the type of the constant is what it would be if the shift expression were replaced by its left operand alone. Expressions of the form yield a boolean value true if expr2, a regular expression, matches expr1 (see also [6]). Both expression must be of type string. If any one of the expressions is NULL the result is NULL. Predicates are special form expressions having a boolean result type. Expressions of the form are equivalent, including NULL handling, to The types of involved expressions must be comparable as defined in "Comparison operators". Another form of the IN predicate creates the expression list from a result of a SelectStmt. The SelectStmt must select only one column. The produced expression list is resource limited by the memory available to the process. NULL values produced by the SelectStmt are ignored, but if all records of the SelectStmt are NULL the predicate yields NULL. The select statement is evaluated only once. If the type of expr is not the same as the type of the field returned by the SelectStmt then the set operation yields false. The type of the column returned by the SelectStmt must be one of the simple (non blob-like) types: Expressions of the form are equivalent, including NULL handling, to The types of involved expressions must be ordered as defined in "Comparison operators". Expressions of the form yield a boolean value true if expr does not have a specific type (case A) or if expr has a specific type (case B). In other cases the result is a boolean value false. Unary operators have the highest precedence. There are five precedence levels for binary operators. Multiplication operators bind strongest, followed by addition operators, comparison operators, && (logical AND), and finally || (logical OR) Binary operators of the same precedence associate from left to right. For instance, x / y * z is the same as (x / y) * z. Note that the operator precedence is reflected explicitly by the grammar. Arithmetic operators apply to numeric values and yield a result of the same type as the first operand. The four standard arithmetic operators (+, -, *, /) apply to integer, rational, floating-point, and complex types; + also applies to strings; +,- also applies to times. All other arithmetic operators apply to integers only. sum integers, rationals, floats, complex values, strings difference integers, rationals, floats, complex values, times product integers, rationals, floats, complex values / quotient integers, rationals, floats, complex values % remainder integers & bitwise AND integers | bitwise OR integers ^ bitwise XOR integers &^ bit clear (AND NOT) integers << left shift integer << unsigned integer >> right shift integer >> unsigned integer Strings can be concatenated using the + operator String addition creates a new string by concatenating the operands. A value of type duration can be added to or subtracted from a value of type time. Times can subtracted from each other producing a value of type duration. For two integer values x and y, the integer quotient q = x / y and remainder r = x % y satisfy the following relationships with x / y truncated towards zero ("truncated division"). As an exception to this rule, if the dividend x is the most negative value for the int type of x, the quotient q = x / -1 is equal to x (and r = 0). If the divisor is a constant expression, it must not be zero. If the divisor is zero at run time, a run-time error occurs. If the dividend is non-negative and the divisor is a constant power of 2, the division may be replaced by a right shift, and computing the remainder may be replaced by a bitwise AND operation The shift operators shift the left operand by the shift count specified by the right operand. They implement arithmetic shifts if the left operand is a signed integer and logical shifts if it is an unsigned integer. There is no upper limit on the shift count. Shifts behave as if the left operand is shifted n times by 1 for a shift count of n. As a result, x << 1 is the same as x*2 and x >> 1 is the same as x/2 but truncated towards negative infinity. For integer operands, the unary operators +, -, and ^ are defined as follows For floating-point and complex numbers, +x is the same as x, while -x is the negation of x. The result of a floating-point or complex division by zero is not specified beyond the IEEE-754 standard; whether a run-time error occurs is implementation-specific. Whenever any operand of any arithmetic operation, unary or binary, is NULL, as well as in the case of the string concatenating operation, the result is NULL. For unsigned integer values, the operations +, -, *, and << are computed modulo 2n, where n is the bit width of the unsigned integer's type. Loosely speaking, these unsigned integer operations discard high bits upon overflow, and expressions may rely on “wrap around”. For signed integers with a finite bit width, the operations +, -, *, and << may legally overflow and the resulting value exists and is deterministically defined by the signed integer representation, the operation, and its operands. No exception is raised as a result of overflow. An evaluator may not optimize an expression under the assumption that overflow does not occur. For instance, it may not assume that x < x + 1 is always true. Integers of type bigint and rationals do not overflow but their handling is limited by the memory resources available to the program. Comparison operators compare two operands and yield a boolean value. In any comparison, the first operand must be of same type as is the second operand, or vice versa. The equality operators == and != apply to operands that are comparable. The ordering operators <, <=, >, and >= apply to operands that are ordered. These terms and the result of the comparisons are defined as follows - Boolean values are comparable. Two boolean values are equal if they are either both true or both false. - Complex values are comparable. Two complex values u and v are equal if both real(u) == real(v) and imag(u) == imag(v). - Integer values are comparable and ordered, in the usual way. Note that durations are integers. - Floating point values are comparable and ordered, as defined by the IEEE-754 standard. - Rational values are comparable and ordered, in the usual way. - String values are comparable and ordered, lexically byte-wise. - Time values are comparable and ordered. Whenever any operand of any comparison operation is NULL, the result is NULL. Note that slices are always of type string. Logical operators apply to boolean values and yield a boolean result. The right operand is evaluated conditionally. The truth tables for logical operations with NULL values Conversions are expressions of the form T(x) where T is a type and x is an expression that can be converted to type T. A constant value x can be converted to type T in any of these cases: - x is representable by a value of type T. - x is a floating-point constant, T is a floating-point type, and x is representable by a value of type T after rounding using IEEE 754 round-to-even rules. The constant T(x) is the rounded value. - x is an integer constant and T is a string type. The same rule as for non-constant x applies in this case. Converting a constant yields a typed constant as result. A non-constant value x can be converted to type T in any of these cases: - x has type T. - x's type and T are both integer or floating point types. - x's type and T are both complex types. - x is an integer, except bigint or duration, and T is a string type. Specific rules apply to (non-constant) conversions between numeric types or to and from a string type. These conversions may change the representation of x and incur a run-time cost. All other conversions only change the type but not the representation of x. A conversion of NULL to any type yields NULL. For the conversion of non-constant numeric values, the following rules apply 1. When converting between integer types, if the value is a signed integer, it is sign extended to implicit infinite precision; otherwise it is zero extended. It is then truncated to fit in the result type's size. For example, if v == uint16(0x10F0), then uint32(int8(v)) == 0xFFFFFFF0. The conversion always yields a valid value; there is no indication of overflow. 2. When converting a floating-point number to an integer, the fraction is discarded (truncation towards zero). 3. When converting an integer or floating-point number to a floating-point type, or a complex number to another complex type, the result value is rounded to the precision specified by the destination type. For instance, the value of a variable x of type float32 may be stored using additional precision beyond that of an IEEE-754 32-bit number, but float32(x) represents the result of rounding x's value to 32-bit precision. Similarly, x + 0.1 may use more than 32 bits of precision, but float32(x + 0.1) does not. In all non-constant conversions involving floating-point or complex values, if the result type cannot represent the value the conversion succeeds but the result value is implementation-dependent. 1. Converting a signed or unsigned integer value to a string type yields a string containing the UTF-8 representation of the integer. Values outside the range of valid Unicode code points are converted to "\uFFFD". 2. Converting a blob to a string type yields a string whose successive bytes are the elements of the blob. 3. Converting a value of a string type to a blob yields a blob whose successive elements are the bytes of the string. 4. Converting a value of a bigint type to a string yields a string containing the decimal decimal representation of the integer. 5. Converting a value of a string type to a bigint yields a bigint value containing the integer represented by the string value. A prefix of “0x” or “0X” selects base 16; the “0” prefix selects base 8, and a “0b” or “0B” prefix selects base 2. Otherwise the value is interpreted in base 10. An error occurs if the string value is not in any valid format. 6. Converting a value of a rational type to a string yields a string containing the decimal decimal representation of the rational in the form "a/b" (even if b == 1). 7. Converting a value of a string type to a bigrat yields a bigrat value containing the rational represented by the string value. The string can be given as a fraction "a/b" or as a floating-point number optionally followed by an exponent. An error occurs if the string value is not in any valid format. 8. Converting a value of a duration type to a string returns a string representing the duration in the form "72h3m0.5s". Leading zero units are omitted. As a special case, durations less than one second format using a smaller unit (milli-, micro-, or nanoseconds) to ensure that the leading digit is non-zero. The zero duration formats as 0, with no unit. 9. Converting a string value to a duration yields a duration represented by the string. A duration string is a possibly signed sequence of decimal numbers, each with optional fraction and a unit suffix, such as "300ms", "-1.5h" or "2h45m". Valid time units are "ns", "us" (or "µs"), "ms", "s", "m", "h". 10. Converting a time value to a string returns the time formatted using the format string When evaluating the operands of an expression or of function calls, operations are evaluated in lexical left-to-right order. For example, in the evaluation of the function calls and evaluation of c happen in the order h(), i(), j(), c. Floating-point operations within a single expression are evaluated according to the associativity of the operators. Explicit parentheses affect the evaluation by overriding the default associativity. In the expression x + (y + z) the addition y + z is performed before adding x. Statements control execution. The empty statement does nothing. Alter table statements modify existing tables. With the ADD clause it adds a new column to the table. The column must not exist. With the DROP clause it removes an existing column from a table. The column must exist and it must be not the only (last) column of the table. IOW, there cannot be a table with no columns. For example When adding a column to a table with existing data, the constraint clause of the ColumnDef cannot be used. Adding a constrained column to an empty table is fine. Begin transactions statements introduce a new transaction level. Every transaction level must be eventually balanced by exactly one of COMMIT or ROLLBACK statements. Note that when a transaction is roll-backed because of a statement failure then no explicit balancing of the respective BEGIN TRANSACTION is statement is required nor permitted. Failure to properly balance any opened transaction level may cause dead locks and/or lose of data updated in the uppermost opened but never properly closed transaction level. For example A database cannot be updated (mutated) outside of a transaction. Statements requiring a transaction A database is effectively read only outside of a transaction. Statements not requiring a transaction The commit statement closes the innermost transaction nesting level. If that's the outermost level then the updates to the DB made by the transaction are atomically made persistent. For example Create index statements create new indices. Index is a named projection of ordered values of a table column to the respective records. As a special case the id() of the record can be indexed. Index name must not be the same as any of the existing tables and it also cannot be the same as of any column name of the table the index is on. For example Now certain SELECT statements may use the indices to speed up joins and/or to speed up record set filtering when the WHERE clause is used; or the indices might be used to improve the performance when the ORDER BY clause is present. The UNIQUE modifier requires the indexed values tuple to be index-wise unique or have all values NULL. The optional IF NOT EXISTS clause makes the statement a no operation if the index already exists. A simple index consists of only one expression which must be either a column name or the built-in id(). A more complex and more general index is one that consists of more than one expression or its single expression does not qualify as a simple index. In this case the type of all expressions in the list must be one of the non blob-like types. Note: Blob-like types are blob, bigint, bigrat, time and duration. Create table statements create new tables. A column definition declares the column name and type. Table names and column names are case sensitive. Neither a table or an index of the same name may exist in the DB. For example The optional IF NOT EXISTS clause makes the statement a no operation if the table already exists. The optional constraint clause has two forms. The first one is found in many SQL dialects. This form prevents the data in column DepartmentName to be NULL. The second form allows an arbitrary boolean expression to be used to validate the column. If the value of the expression is true then the validation succeeded. If the value of the expression is false or NULL then the validation fails. If the value of the expression is not of type bool an error occurs. The optional DEFAULT clause is an expression which, if present, is substituted instead of a NULL value when the colum is assigned a value. Note that the constraint and/or default expressions may refer to other columns by name: When a table row is inserted by the INSERT INTO statement or when a table row is updated by the UPDATE statement, the order of operations is as follows: 1. The new values of the affected columns are set and the values of all the row columns become the named values which can be referred to in default expressions evaluated in step 2. 2. If any row column value is NULL and the DEFAULT clause is present in the column's definition, the default expression is evaluated and its value is set as the respective column value. 3. The values, potentially updated, of row columns become the named values which can be referred to in constraint expressions evaluated during step 4. 4. All row columns which definition has the constraint clause present will have that constraint checked. If any constraint violation is detected, the overall operation fails and no changes to the table are made. Delete from statements remove rows from a table, which must exist. For example If the WHERE clause is not present then all rows are removed and the statement is equivalent to the TRUNCATE TABLE statement. Drop index statements remove indices from the DB. The index must exist. For example The optional IF EXISTS clause makes the statement a no operation if the index does not exist. Drop table statements remove tables from the DB. The table must exist. For example The optional IF EXISTS clause makes the statement a no operation if the table does not exist. Insert into statements insert new rows into tables. New rows come from literal data, if using the VALUES clause, or are a result of select statement. In the later case the select statement is fully evaluated before the insertion of any rows is performed, allowing to insert values calculated from the same table rows are to be inserted into. If the ColumnNameList part is omitted then the number of values inserted in the row must be the same as are columns in the table. If the ColumnNameList part is present then the number of values per row must be same as the same number of column names. All other columns of the record are set to NULL. The type of the value assigned to a column must be the same as is the column's type or the value must be NULL. For example If any of the columns of the table were defined using the optional constraints clause or the optional defaults clause then those are processed on a per row basis. The details are discussed in the "Constraints and defaults" chapter below the CREATE TABLE statement documentation. Explain statement produces a recordset consisting of lines of text which describe the execution plan of a statement, if any. For example, the QL tool treats the explain statement specially and outputs the joined lines: The explanation may aid in uderstanding how a statement/query would be executed and if indices are used as expected - or which indices may possibly improve the statement performance. The create index statements above were directly copy/pasted in the terminal from the suggestions provided by the filter recordset pipeline part returned by the explain statement. If the statement has nothing special in its plan, the result is the original statement. To get an explanation of the select statement of the IN predicate, use the EXPLAIN statement with that particular select statement. The rollback statement closes the innermost transaction nesting level discarding any updates to the DB made by it. If that's the outermost level then the effects on the DB are as if the transaction never happened. For example The (temporary) record set from the last statement is returned and can be processed by the client. In this case the rollback is the same as 'DROP TABLE tmp;' but it can be a more complex operation. Select from statements produce recordsets. The optional DISTINCT modifier ensures all rows in the result recordset are unique. Either all of the resulting fields are returned ('*') or only those named in FieldList. RecordSetList is a list of table names or parenthesized select statements, optionally (re)named using the AS clause. The result can be filtered using a WhereClause and orderd by the OrderBy clause. For example If Recordset is a nested, parenthesized SelectStmt then it must be given a name using the AS clause if its field are to be accessible in expressions. A field is an named expression. Identifiers, not used as a type in conversion or a function name in the Call clause, denote names of (other) fields, values of which should be used in the expression. The expression can be named using the AS clause. If the AS clause is not present and the expression consists solely of a field name, then that field name is used as the name of the resulting field. Otherwise the field is unnamed. For example The SELECT statement can optionally enumerate the desired/resulting fields in a list. No two identical field names can appear in the list. When more than one record set is used in the FROM clause record set list, the result record set field names are rewritten to be qualified using the record set names. If a particular record set doesn't have a name, its respective fields became unnamed. The optional JOIN clause, for example is mostly equal to except that the rows from a which, when they appear in the cross join, never made expr to evaluate to true, are combined with a virtual row from b, containing all nulls, and added to the result set. For the RIGHT JOIN variant the discussed rules are used for rows from b not satisfying expr == true and the virtual, all-null row "comes" from a. The FULL JOIN adds the respective rows which would be otherwise provided by the separate executions of the LEFT JOIN and RIGHT JOIN variants. For more thorough OUTER JOIN discussion please see the Wikipedia article at [10]. Resultins rows of a SELECT statement can be optionally ordered by the ORDER BY clause. Collating proceeds by considering the expressions in the expression list left to right until a collating order is determined. Any possibly remaining expressions are not evaluated. All of the expression values must yield an ordered type or NULL. Ordered types are defined in "Comparison operators". Collating of elements having a NULL value is different compared to what the comparison operators yield in expression evaluation (NULL result instead of a boolean value). Below, T denotes a non NULL value of any QL type. NULL collates before any non NULL value (is considered smaller than T). Two NULLs have no collating order (are considered equal). The WHERE clause restricts records considered by some statements, like SELECT FROM, DELETE FROM, or UPDATE. It is an error if the expression evaluates to a non null value of non bool type. The GROUP BY clause is used to project rows having common values into a smaller set of rows. For example Using the GROUP BY without any aggregate functions in the selected fields is in certain cases equal to using the DISTINCT modifier. The last two examples above produce the same resultsets. The optional OFFSET clause allows to ignore first N records. For example The above will produce only rows 11, 12, ... of the record set, if they exist. The value of the expression must a non negative integer, but not bigint or duration. The optional LIMIT clause allows to ignore all but first N records. For example The above will return at most the first 10 records of the record set. The value of the expression must a non negative integer, but not bigint or duration. The LIMIT and OFFSET clauses can be combined. For example Considering table t has, say 10 records, the above will produce only records 4 - 8. After returning record #8, no more result rows/records are computed. 1. The FROM clause is evaluated, producing a Cartesian product of its source record sets (tables or nested SELECT statements). 2. If present, the JOIN cluase is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation and the recordset specified by the JOIN clause. (... JOIN Recordset ON ...) 3. If present, the WHERE clause is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation. 4. If present, the GROUP BY clause is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). 5. The SELECT field expressions are evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). 6. If present, the DISTINCT modifier is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). 7. If present, the ORDER BY clause is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). 8. If present, the OFFSET clause is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). The offset expression is evaluated once for the first record produced by the previous evaluations. 9. If present, the LIMIT clause is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). The limit expression is evaluated once for the first record produced by the previous evaluations. Truncate table statements remove all records from a table. The table must exist. For example Update statements change values of fields in rows of a table. For example Note: The SET clause is optional. If any of the columns of the table were defined using the optional constraints clause or the optional defaults clause then those are processed on a per row basis. The details are discussed in the "Constraints and defaults" chapter below the CREATE TABLE statement documentation. To allow to query for DB meta data, there exist specially named tables, some of them being virtual. Note: Virtual system tables may have fake table-wise unique but meaningless and unstable record IDs. Do not apply the built-in id() to any system table. The table __Table lists all tables in the DB. The schema is The Schema column returns the statement to (re)create table Name. This table is virtual. The table __Colum lists all columns of all tables in the DB. The schema is The Ordinal column defines the 1-based index of the column in the record. This table is virtual. The table __Colum2 lists all columns of all tables in the DB which have the constraint NOT NULL or which have a constraint expression defined or which have a default expression defined. The schema is It's possible to obtain a consolidated recordset for all properties of all DB columns using The Name column is the column name in TableName. The table __Index lists all indices in the DB. The schema is The IsUnique columns reflects if the index was created using the optional UNIQUE clause. This table is virtual. Built-in functions are predeclared. The built-in aggregate function avg returns the average of values of an expression. Avg ignores NULL values, but returns NULL if all values of a column are NULL or if avg is applied to an empty record set. The column values must be of a numeric type. The built-in function contains returns true if substr is within s. If any argument to contains is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in aggregate function count returns how many times an expression has a non NULL values or the number of rows in a record set. Note: count() returns 0 for an empty record set. For example Date returns the time corresponding to in the appropriate zone for that time in the given location. The month, day, hour, min, sec, and nsec values may be outside their usual ranges and will be normalized during the conversion. For example, October 32 converts to November 1. A daylight savings time transition skips or repeats times. For example, in the United States, March 13, 2011 2:15am never occurred, while November 6, 2011 1:15am occurred twice. In such cases, the choice of time zone, and therefore the time, is not well-defined. Date returns a time that is correct in one of the two zones involved in the transition, but it does not guarantee which. A location maps time instants to the zone in use at that time. Typically, the location represents the collection of time offsets in use in a geographical area, such as "CEST" and "CET" for central Europe. "local" represents the system's local time zone. "UTC" represents Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). The month specifies a month of the year (January = 1, ...). If any argument to date is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function day returns the day of the month specified by t. If the argument to day is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function formatTime returns a textual representation of the time value formatted according to layout, which defines the format by showing how the reference time, would be displayed if it were the value; it serves as an example of the desired output. The same display rules will then be applied to the time value. If any argument to formatTime is NULL the result is NULL. NOTE: The string value of the time zone, like "CET" or "ACDT", is dependent on the time zone of the machine the function is run on. For example, if the t value is in "CET", but the machine is in "ACDT", instead of "CET" the result is "+0100". This is the same what Go (time.Time).String() returns and in fact formatTime directly calls t.String(). returns on a machine in the CET time zone, but may return on a machine in the ACDT zone. The time value is in both cases the same so its ordering and comparing is correct. Only the display value can differ. The built-in functions formatFloat and formatInt format numbers to strings using go's number format functions in the `strconv` package. For all three functions, only the first argument is mandatory. The default values of the rest are shown in the examples. If the first argument is NULL, the result is NULL. returns returns returns Unlike the `strconv` equivalent, the formatInt function handles all integer types, both signed and unsigned. The built-in function hasPrefix tests whether the string s begins with prefix. If any argument to hasPrefix is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function hasSuffix tests whether the string s ends with suffix. If any argument to hasSuffix is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function hour returns the hour within the day specified by t, in the range [0, 23]. If the argument to hour is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function hours returns the duration as a floating point number of hours. If the argument to hours is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function id takes zero or one arguments. If no argument is provided, id() returns a table-unique automatically assigned numeric identifier of type int. Ids of deleted records are not reused unless the DB becomes completely empty (has no tables). For example If id() without arguments is called for a row which is not a table record then the result value is NULL. For example If id() has one argument it must be a table name of a table in a cross join. For example The built-in function len takes a string argument and returns the lentgh of the string in bytes. The expression len(s) is constant if s is a string constant. If the argument to len is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in aggregate function max returns the largest value of an expression in a record set. Max ignores NULL values, but returns NULL if all values of a column are NULL or if max is applied to an empty record set. The expression values must be of an ordered type. For example The built-in aggregate function min returns the smallest value of an expression in a record set. Min ignores NULL values, but returns NULL if all values of a column are NULL or if min is applied to an empty record set. For example The column values must be of an ordered type. The built-in function minute returns the minute offset within the hour specified by t, in the range [0, 59]. If the argument to minute is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function minutes returns the duration as a floating point number of minutes. If the argument to minutes is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function month returns the month of the year specified by t (January = 1, ...). If the argument to month is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function nanosecond returns the nanosecond offset within the second specified by t, in the range [0, 999999999]. If the argument to nanosecond is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function nanoseconds returns the duration as an integer nanosecond count. If the argument to nanoseconds is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function now returns the current local time. The built-in function parseTime parses a formatted string and returns the time value it represents. The layout defines the format by showing how the reference time, would be interpreted if it were the value; it serves as an example of the input format. The same interpretation will then be made to the input string. Elements omitted from the value are assumed to be zero or, when zero is impossible, one, so parsing "3:04pm" returns the time corresponding to Jan 1, year 0, 15:04:00 UTC (note that because the year is 0, this time is before the zero Time). Years must be in the range 0000..9999. The day of the week is checked for syntax but it is otherwise ignored. In the absence of a time zone indicator, parseTime returns a time in UTC. When parsing a time with a zone offset like -0700, if the offset corresponds to a time zone used by the current location, then parseTime uses that location and zone in the returned time. Otherwise it records the time as being in a fabricated location with time fixed at the given zone offset. When parsing a time with a zone abbreviation like MST, if the zone abbreviation has a defined offset in the current location, then that offset is used. The zone abbreviation "UTC" is recognized as UTC regardless of location. If the zone abbreviation is unknown, Parse records the time as being in a fabricated location with the given zone abbreviation and a zero offset. This choice means that such a time can be parses and reformatted with the same layout losslessly, but the exact instant used in the representation will differ by the actual zone offset. To avoid such problems, prefer time layouts that use a numeric zone offset. If any argument to parseTime is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function second returns the second offset within the minute specified by t, in the range [0, 59]. If the argument to second is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function seconds returns the duration as a floating point number of seconds. If the argument to seconds is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function since returns the time elapsed since t. It is shorthand for now()-t. If the argument to since is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in aggregate function sum returns the sum of values of an expression for all rows of a record set. Sum ignores NULL values, but returns NULL if all values of a column are NULL or if sum is applied to an empty record set. The column values must be of a numeric type. The built-in function timeIn returns t with the location information set to loc. For discussion of the loc argument please see date(). If any argument to timeIn is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function weekday returns the day of the week specified by t. Sunday == 0, Monday == 1, ... If the argument to weekday is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function year returns the year in which t occurs. If the argument to year is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function yearDay returns the day of the year specified by t, in the range [1,365] for non-leap years, and [1,366] in leap years. If the argument to yearDay is NULL the result is NULL. Three functions assemble and disassemble complex numbers. The built-in function complex constructs a complex value from a floating-point real and imaginary part, while real and imag extract the real and imaginary parts of a complex value. The type of the arguments and return value correspond. For complex, the two arguments must be of the same floating-point type and the return type is the complex type with the corresponding floating-point constituents: complex64 for float32, complex128 for float64. The real and imag functions together form the inverse, so for a complex value z, z == complex(real(z), imag(z)). If the operands of these functions are all constants, the return value is a constant. If any argument to any of complex, real, imag functions is NULL the result is NULL. For the numeric types, the following sizes are guaranteed Portions of this specification page are modifications based on work[2] created and shared by Google[3] and used according to terms described in the Creative Commons 3.0 Attribution License[4]. This specification is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution 3.0 License, and code is licensed under a BSD license[5]. Links from the above documentation This section is not part of the specification. WARNING: The implementation of indices is new and it surely needs more time to become mature. Indices are used currently used only by the WHERE clause. The following expression patterns of 'WHERE expression' are recognized and trigger index use. The relOp is one of the relation operators <, <=, ==, >=, >. For the equality operator both operands must be of comparable types. For all other operators both operands must be of ordered types. The constant expression is a compile time constant expression. Some constant folding is still a TODO. Parameter is a QL parameter ($1 etc.). Consider tables t and u, both with an indexed field f. The WHERE expression doesn't comply with the above simple detected cases. However, such query is now automatically rewritten to which will use both of the indices. The impact of using the indices can be substantial (cf. BenchmarkCrossJoin*) if the resulting rows have low "selectivity", ie. only few rows from both tables are selected by the respective WHERE filtering. Note: Existing QL DBs can be used and indices can be added to them. However, once any indices are present in the DB, the old QL versions cannot work with such DB anymore. Running a benchmark with -v (-test.v) outputs information about the scale used to report records/s and a brief description of the benchmark. For example Running the full suite of benchmarks takes a lot of time. Use the -timeout flag to avoid them being killed after the default time limit (10 minutes).

Package cli provides a framework to build command line applications in Go with most of the burden of arguments parsing and validation placed on the framework instead of the user. To create a new application, initialize an app with cli.App. Specify a name and a brief description for the application: To attach code to execute when the app is launched, assign a function to the Action field: To assign a version to the application, use Version method and specify the flags that will be used to invoke the version command: Finally, in the main func, call Run passing in the arguments for parsing: To add one or more command line options (also known as flags), use one of the short-form StringOpt, StringsOpt, IntOpt, IntsOpt, or BoolOpt methods on App (or Cmd if adding flags to a command or subcommand). For example, to add a boolean flag to the cp command that specifies recursive mode, use the following: The first argument is a space separated list of names for the option without the dashes. Generally, both short and long forms are specified, but this is not mandatory. Additional names (aliases) can be provide if desired, but these are not shown in the auto-generated help. The second argument is the default value for the option if it is not supplied by the user. And, the third argument is the description to be shown in help messages. There is also a second set of methods on App called String, Strings, Int, Ints, and Bool, which accept a long-form struct of the type: cli.StringOpt, cli.StringsOpt, cli.IntOpt, cli.IntsOpt, cli.BoolOpt. The struct describes the option and allows the use of additional features not available in the short-form methods described above: Two features, EnvVar and SetByUser, can be defined in the long-form struct method. EnvVar is a space separated list of environment variables used to initialize the option if a value is not provided by the user. When help messages are shown, the value of any environment variables will be displayed. SetByUser is a pointer to a boolean variable that is set to true if the user specified the value on the command line. This can be useful to determine if the value of the option was explicitly set by the user or set via the default value. The result of both short- and long-forms is a pointer to a value, which will be populated after the command line arguments are parsed. You can only access the values stored in the pointers in the Action func, which is invoked after argument parsing has been completed. This precludes using the value of one option as the default value of another. On the command line, the following syntaxes are supported when specifying options. Boolean options: String and int options: Slice options (StringsOpt, IntsOpt) where option is repeated to accumulate values in a slice: To add one or more command line arguments (not prefixed by dashes), use one of the short-form StringArg, StringsArg, IntArg, IntsArg, or BoolArg methods on App (or Cmd if adding arguments to a command or subcommand). For example, to add two string arguments to our cp command, use the following calls: The first argument is the name of the argument as displayed in help messages. Argument names must be specified as all uppercase. The second argument is the default value for the argument if it is not supplied. And the third, argument is the description to be shown in help messages. There is also a second set of methods on App called String, Strings, Int, Ints, and Bool, which accept a long-form struct of the type: cli.StringArg, cli.StringsArg, cli.IntArg, cli.IntsArg, cli.BoolArg. The struct describes the arguments and allows the use of additional features not available in the short-form methods described above: Two features, EnvVar and SetByUser, can be defined in the long-form struct method. EnvVar is a space separated list of environment variables used to initialize the argument if a value is not provided by the user. When help messages are shown, the value of any environment variables will be displayed. SetByUser is a pointer to a boolean variable that is set to true if the user specified the value on the command line. This can be useful to determine if the value of the argument was explicitly set by the user or set via the default value. The result of both short- and long-forms is a pointer to a value which will be populated after the command line arguments are parsed. You can only access the values stored in the pointers in the Action func, which is invoked after argument parsing has been completed. This precludes using the value of one argument as the default value of another. The -- operator marks the end of command line options. Everything that follows will be treated as an argument, even if starts with a dash. For example, the standard POSIX touch command, which takes a filename as an argument (and possibly other options that we'll ignore here), could be defined as: If we try to create a file named "-f" via our touch command: It will fail because the -f will be parsed as an option, not as an argument. The fix is to insert -- after all flags have been specified, so the remaining arguments are parsed as arguments instead of options as follows: This ensures the -f is parsed as an argument instead of a flag named f. This package supports nesting of commands and subcommands. Declare a top-level command by calling the Command func on the top-level App struct. For example, the following creates an application called docker that will have one command called run: The first argument is the name of the command the user will specify on the command line to invoke this command. The second argument is the description of the command shown in help messages. And, the last argument is a CmdInitializer, which is a function that receives a pointer to a Cmd struct representing the command. Within this function, define the options and arguments for the command by calling the same methods as you would with top-level App struct (BoolOpt, StringArg, ...). To execute code when the command is invoked, assign a function to the Action field of the Cmd struct. Within that function, you can safely refer to the options and arguments as command line parsing will be completed at the time the function is invoked: Optionally, to provide a more extensive description of the command, assign a string to LongDesc, which is displayed when a user invokes --help. A LongDesc can be provided for Cmds as well as the top-level App: Subcommands can be added by calling Command on the Cmd struct. They can by defined to any depth if needed: Command and subcommand aliases are also supported. To define one or more aliases, specify a space-separated list of strings to the first argument of Command: With the command structure defined above, users can invoke the app in a variety of ways: As a convenience, to assign an Action to a func with no arguments, use ActionCommand when defining the Command. For example, the following two statements are equivalent: Please note that options, arguments, specs, and long descriptions cannot be provided when using ActionCommand. This is intended for very simple command invocations that take no arguments. Finally, as a side-note, it may seem a bit weird that this package uses a function to initialize a command instead of simply returning a command struct. The motivation behind this API decision is scoping: as with the standard flag package, adding an option or an argument returns a pointer to a value which will be populated when the app is run. Since you'll want to store these pointers in variables, and to avoid having dozens of them in the same scope (the main func for example or as global variables), this API was specifically tailored to take a func parameter (called CmdInitializer), which accepts the command struct. With this design, the command's specific variables are limited in scope to this function. Interceptors, or hooks, can be defined to be executed before and after a command or when any of its subcommands are executed. For example, the following app defines multiple commands as well as a global flag which toggles verbosity: Instead of duplicating the check for the verbose flag and setting the debug level in every command (and its sub-commands), a Before interceptor can be set on the top-level App instead: Whenever a valid command is called by the user, all the Before interceptors defined on the app and the intermediate commands will be called, in order from the root to the leaf. Similarly, to execute a hook after a command has been called, e.g. to cleanup resources allocated in Before interceptors, simply set the After field of the App struct or any other Command. After interceptors will be called, in order, from the leaf up to the root (the opposite order of the Before interceptors). The following diagram shows when and in which order multiple Before and After interceptors are executed: To exit the application, use cli.Exit function, which accepts an exit code and exits the app with the provided code. It is important to use cli.Exit instead of os.Exit as the former ensures that all of the After interceptors are executed before exiting. An App or Command's invocation syntax can be customized using spec strings. This can be useful to indicate that an argument is optional or that two options are mutually exclusive. The spec string is one of the key differentiators between this package and other CLI packages as it allows the developer to express usage in a simple, familiar, yet concise grammar. To define option and argument usage for the top-level App, assign a spec string to the App's Spec field: Likewise, to define option and argument usage for a command or subcommand, assign a spec string to the Command's Spec field: The spec syntax is mostly based on the conventions used in POSIX command line applications (help messages and man pages). This syntax is described in full below. If a user invokes the app or command with the incorrect syntax, the app terminates with a help message showing the proper invocation. The remainder of this section describes the many features and capabilities of the spec string grammar. Options can use both short and long option names in spec strings. In the example below, the option is mandatory and must be provided. Any options referenced in a spec string MUST be explicitly declared, otherwise this package will panic. I.e. for each item in the spec string, a corresponding *Opt or *Arg is required: Arguments are specified with all-uppercased words. In the example below, both SRC and DST must be provided by the user (two arguments). Like options, any argument referenced in a spec string MUST be explicitly declared, otherwise this package will panic: With the exception of options, the order of the elements in a spec string is respected and enforced when command line arguments are parsed. In the example below, consecutive options (-f and -g) are parsed regardless of the order they are specified (both "-f=5 -g=6" and "-g=6 -f=5" are valid). Order between options and arguments is significant (-f and -g must appear before the SRC argument). The same holds true for arguments, where SRC must appear before DST: Optionality of options and arguments is specified in a spec string by enclosing the item in square brackets []. If the user does not provide an optional value, the app will use the default value specified when the argument was defined. In the example below, if -x is not provided, heapSize will default to 1024: Choice between two or more items is specified in a spec string by separating each choice with the | operator. Choices are mutually exclusive. In the examples below, only a single choice can be provided by the user otherwise the app will terminate displaying a help message on proper usage: Repetition of options and arguments is specified in a spec string with the ... postfix operator to mark an item as repeatable. Both options and arguments support repitition. In the example below, users may invoke the command with multiple -e options and multiple SRC arguments: Grouping of options and arguments is specified in a spec string with parenthesis. When combined with the choice | and repetition ... operators, complex syntaxes can be created. The parenthesis in the example below indicate a repeatable sequence of a -e option followed by an argument, and that is mutually exclusive to a choice between -x and -y options. Option groups, or option folding, are a shorthand method to declaring a choice between multiple options. I.e. any combination of the listed options in any order with at least one option selected. The following two statements are equivalent: Option groups are typically used in conjunction with optionality [] operators. I.e. any combination of the listed options in any order or none at all. The following two statements are equivalent: All of the options can be specified using a special syntax: [OPTIONS]. This is a special token in the spec string (not optionality and not an argument called OPTIONS). It is equivalent to an optional repeatable choice between all the available options. For example, if an app or a command declares 4 options a, b, c and d, then the following two statements are equivalent: Inline option values are specified in the spec string with the =<some-text> notation immediately following an option (long or short form) to provide users with an inline description or value. The actual inline values are ignored by the spec parser as they exist only to provide a contextual hint to the user. In the example below, "absolute-path" and "in seconds" are ignored by the parser: The -- operator can be used to automatically treat everything following it as arguments. In other words, placing a -- in the spec string automatically inserts a -- in the same position in the program call arguments. This lets you write programs such as the POSIX time utility for example: Below is the full EBNF grammar for the Specs language: By combining a few of these building blocks together (while respecting the grammar above), powerful and sophisticated validation constraints can be created in a simple and concise manner without having to define in code. This is one of the key differentiators between this package and other CLI packages. Validation of usage is handled entirely by the package through the spec string. Behind the scenes, this package parses the spec string and constructs a finite state machine used to parse the command line arguments. It also handles backtracking, which allows it to handle tricky cases, or what I like to call "the cp test": Without backtracking, this deceptively simple spec string cannot be parsed correctly. For instance, docopt can't handle this case, whereas this package does. By default an auto-generated spec string is created for the app and every command unless a spec string has been set by the user. This can simplify use of the package even further for simple syntaxes. The following logic is used to create an auto-generated spec string: 1) start with an empty spec string, 2) if at least one option was declared, append "[OPTIONS]" to the spec string, and 3) for each declared argument, append it, in the order of declaration, to the spec string. For example, given this command declaration: The auto-generated spec string, which should suffice for simple cases, would be: If additional constraints are required, the spec string must be set explicitly using the grammar documented above. By default, the following types are supported for options and arguments: bool, string, int, strings (slice of strings), and ints (slice of ints). You can, however, extend this package to handle other types, e.g. time.Duration, float64, or even your own struct types. To define your own custom type, you must implement the flag.Value interface for your custom type, and then declare the option or argument using VarOpt or VarArg respectively if using the short-form methods. If using the long-form struct, then use Var instead. The following example defines a custom type for a duration. It defines a duration argument that users will be able to invoke with strings in the form of "1h31m42s": To make a custom type to behave as a boolean option, i.e. doesn't take a value, it must implement the IsBoolFlag method that returns true: To make a custom type behave as a multi-valued option or argument, i.e. takes multiple values, it must implement the Clear method, which is called whenever the values list needs to be cleared, e.g. when the value was initially populated from an environment variable, and then explicitly set from the CLI: To hide the default value of a custom type, it must implement the IsDefault method that returns a boolean. The help message generator will use the return value to decide whether or not to display the default value to users:

Package gofpdf implements a PDF document generator with high level support for text, drawing and images. - UTF-8 support - Choice of measurement unit, page format and margins - Page header and footer management - Automatic page breaks, line breaks, and text justification - Inclusion of JPEG, PNG, GIF, TIFF and basic path-only SVG images - Colors, gradients and alpha channel transparency - Outline bookmarks - Internal and external links - TrueType, Type1 and encoding support - Page compression - Lines, Bézier curves, arcs, and ellipses - Rotation, scaling, skewing, translation, and mirroring - Clipping - Document protection - Layers - Templates - Barcodes - Charting facility - Import PDFs as templates gofpdf has no dependencies other than the Go standard library. All tests pass on Linux, Mac and Windows platforms. gofpdf supports UTF-8 TrueType fonts and “right-to-left” languages. Note that Chinese, Japanese, and Korean characters may not be included in many general purpose fonts. For these languages, a specialized font (for example, NotoSansSC for simplified Chinese) can be used. Also, support is provided to automatically translate UTF-8 runes to code page encodings for languages that have fewer than 256 glyphs. This repository will not be maintained, at least for some unknown duration. But it is hoped that gofpdf has a bright future in the open source world. Due to Go’s promise of compatibility, gofpdf should continue to function without modification for a longer time than would be the case with many other languages. Forks should be based on the last viable commit. Tools such as active-forks can be used to select a fork that looks promising for your needs. If a particular fork looks like it has taken the lead in attracting followers, this README will be updated to point people in that direction. The efforts of all contributors to this project have been deeply appreciated. Best wishes to all of you. To install the package on your system, run Later, to receive updates, run The following Go code generates a simple PDF file. See the functions in the fpdf_test.go file (shown as examples in this documentation) for more advanced PDF examples. If an error occurs in an Fpdf method, an internal error field is set. After this occurs, Fpdf method calls typically return without performing any operations and the error state is retained. This error management scheme facilitates PDF generation since individual method calls do not need to be examined for failure; it is generally sufficient to wait until after Output() is called. For the same reason, if an error occurs in the calling application during PDF generation, it may be desirable for the application to transfer the error to the Fpdf instance by calling the SetError() method or the SetErrorf() method. At any time during the life cycle of the Fpdf instance, the error state can be determined with a call to Ok() or Err(). The error itself can be retrieved with a call to Error(). This package is a relatively straightforward translation from the original FPDF library written in PHP (despite the caveat in the introduction to Effective Go). The API names have been retained even though the Go idiom would suggest otherwise (for example, pdf.GetX() is used rather than simply pdf.X()). The similarity of the two libraries makes the original FPDF website a good source of information. It includes a forum and FAQ. However, some internal changes have been made. Page content is built up using buffers (of type bytes.Buffer) rather than repeated string concatenation. Errors are handled as explained above rather than panicking. Output is generated through an interface of type io.Writer or io.WriteCloser. A number of the original PHP methods behave differently based on the type of the arguments that are passed to them; in these cases additional methods have been exported to provide similar functionality. Font definition files are produced in JSON rather than PHP. A side effect of running go test ./... is the production of a number of example PDFs. These can be found in the gofpdf/pdf directory after the tests complete. Please note that these examples run in the context of a test. In order run an example as a standalone application, you’ll need to examine fpdf_test.go for some helper routines, for example exampleFilename() and summary(). Example PDFs can be compared with reference copies in order to verify that they have been generated as expected. This comparison will be performed if a PDF with the same name as the example PDF is placed in the gofpdf/pdf/reference directory and if the third argument to ComparePDFFiles() in internal/example/example.go is true. (By default it is false.) The routine that summarizes an example will look for this file and, if found, will call ComparePDFFiles() to check the example PDF for equality with its reference PDF. If differences exist between the two files they will be printed to standard output and the test will fail. If the reference file is missing, the comparison is considered to succeed. In order to successfully compare two PDFs, the placement of internal resources must be consistent and the internal creation timestamps must be the same. To do this, the methods SetCatalogSort() and SetCreationDate() need to be called for both files. This is done automatically for all examples. Nothing special is required to use the standard PDF fonts (courier, helvetica, times, zapfdingbats) in your documents other than calling SetFont(). You should use AddUTF8Font() or AddUTF8FontFromBytes() to add a TrueType UTF-8 encoded font. Use RTL() and LTR() methods switch between “right-to-left” and “left-to-right” mode. In order to use a different non-UTF-8 TrueType or Type1 font, you will need to generate a font definition file and, if the font will be embedded into PDFs, a compressed version of the font file. This is done by calling the MakeFont function or using the included makefont command line utility. To create the utility, cd into the makefont subdirectory and run “go build”. This will produce a standalone executable named makefont. Select the appropriate encoding file from the font subdirectory and run the command as in the following example. In your PDF generation code, call AddFont() to load the font and, as with the standard fonts, SetFont() to begin using it. Most examples, including the package example, demonstrate this method. Good sources of free, open-source fonts include Google Fonts and DejaVu Fonts. The draw2d package is a two dimensional vector graphics library that can generate output in different forms. It uses gofpdf for its document production mode. gofpdf is a global community effort and you are invited to make it even better. If you have implemented a new feature or corrected a problem, please consider contributing your change to the project. A contribution that does not directly pertain to the core functionality of gofpdf should be placed in its own directory directly beneath the contrib directory. Here are guidelines for making submissions. Your change should - be compatible with the MIT License - be properly documented - be formatted with go fmt - include an example in fpdf_test.go if appropriate - conform to the standards of golint and go vet, that is, golint . and go vet . should not generate any warnings - not diminish test coverage Pull requests are the preferred means of accepting your changes. gofpdf is released under the MIT License. It is copyrighted by Kurt Jung and the contributors acknowledged below. This package’s code and documentation are closely derived from the FPDF library created by Olivier Plathey, and a number of font and image resources are copied directly from it. Bruno Michel has provided valuable assistance with the code. Drawing support is adapted from the FPDF geometric figures script by David Hernández Sanz. Transparency support is adapted from the FPDF transparency script by Martin Hall-May. Support for gradients and clipping is adapted from FPDF scripts by Andreas Würmser. Support for outline bookmarks is adapted from Olivier Plathey by Manuel Cornes. Layer support is adapted from Olivier Plathey. Support for transformations is adapted from the FPDF transformation script by Moritz Wagner and Andreas Würmser. PDF protection is adapted from the work of Klemen Vodopivec for the FPDF product. Lawrence Kesteloot provided code to allow an image’s extent to be determined prior to placement. Support for vertical alignment within a cell was provided by Stefan Schroeder. Ivan Daniluk generalized the font and image loading code to use the Reader interface while maintaining backward compatibility. Anthony Starks provided code for the Polygon function. Robert Lillack provided the Beziergon function and corrected some naming issues with the internal curve function. Claudio Felber provided implementations for dashed line drawing and generalized font loading. Stani Michiels provided support for multi-segment path drawing with smooth line joins, line join styles, enhanced fill modes, and has helped greatly with package presentation and tests. Templating is adapted by Marcus Downing from the FPDF_Tpl library created by Jan Slabon and Setasign. Jelmer Snoeck contributed packages that generate a variety of barcodes and help with registering images on the web. Jelmer Snoek and Guillermo Pascual augmented the basic HTML functionality with aligned text. Kent Quirk implemented backwards-compatible support for reading DPI from images that support it, and for setting DPI manually and then having it properly taken into account when calculating image size. Paulo Coutinho provided support for static embedded fonts. Dan Meyers added support for embedded JavaScript. David Fish added a generic alias-replacement function to enable, among other things, table of contents functionality. Andy Bakun identified and corrected a problem in which the internal catalogs were not sorted stably. Paul Montag added encoding and decoding functionality for templates, including images that are embedded in templates; this allows templates to be stored independently of gofpdf. Paul also added support for page boxes used in printing PDF documents. Wojciech Matusiak added supported for word spacing. Artem Korotkiy added support of UTF-8 fonts. Dave Barnes added support for imported objects and templates. Brigham Thompson added support for rounded rectangles. Joe Westcott added underline functionality and optimized image storage. Benoit KUGLER contributed support for rectangles with corners of unequal radius, modification times, and for file attachments and annotations. - Remove all legacy code page font support; use UTF-8 exclusively - Improve test coverage as reported by the coverage tool. Example demonstrates the generation of a simple PDF document. Note that since only core fonts are used (in this case Arial, a synonym for Helvetica), an empty string can be specified for the font directory in the call to New(). Note also that the example.Filename() and example.Summary() functions belong to a separate, internal package and are not part of the gofpdf library. If an error occurs at some point during the construction of the document, subsequent method calls exit immediately and the error is finally retrieved with the output call where it can be handled by the application.

Package gofpdf implements a PDF document generator with high level support for text, drawing and images. - UTF-8 support - Choice of measurement unit, page format and margins - Page header and footer management - Automatic page breaks, line breaks, and text justification - Inclusion of JPEG, PNG, GIF, TIFF and basic path-only SVG images - Colors, gradients and alpha channel transparency - Outline bookmarks - Internal and external links - TrueType, Type1 and encoding support - Page compression - Lines, Bézier curves, arcs, and ellipses - Rotation, scaling, skewing, translation, and mirroring - Clipping - Document protection - Layers - Templates - Barcodes - Charting facility - Import PDFs as templates gofpdf has no dependencies other than the Go standard library. All tests pass on Linux, Mac and Windows platforms. gofpdf supports UTF-8 TrueType fonts and “right-to-left” languages. Note that Chinese, Japanese, and Korean characters may not be included in many general purpose fonts. For these languages, a specialized font (for example, NotoSansSC for simplified Chinese) can be used. Also, support is provided to automatically translate UTF-8 runes to code page encodings for languages that have fewer than 256 glyphs. This repository will not be maintained, at least for some unknown duration. But it is hoped that gofpdf has a bright future in the open source world. Due to Go’s promise of compatibility, gofpdf should continue to function without modification for a longer time than would be the case with many other languages. Forks should be based on the last viable commit. Tools such as active-forks can be used to select a fork that looks promising for your needs. If a particular fork looks like it has taken the lead in attracting followers, this README will be updated to point people in that direction. The efforts of all contributors to this project have been deeply appreciated. Best wishes to all of you. To install the package on your system, run Later, to receive updates, run The following Go code generates a simple PDF file. See the functions in the fpdf_test.go file (shown as examples in this documentation) for more advanced PDF examples. If an error occurs in an Fpdf method, an internal error field is set. After this occurs, Fpdf method calls typically return without performing any operations and the error state is retained. This error management scheme facilitates PDF generation since individual method calls do not need to be examined for failure; it is generally sufficient to wait until after Output() is called. For the same reason, if an error occurs in the calling application during PDF generation, it may be desirable for the application to transfer the error to the Fpdf instance by calling the SetError() method or the SetErrorf() method. At any time during the life cycle of the Fpdf instance, the error state can be determined with a call to Ok() or Err(). The error itself can be retrieved with a call to Error(). This package is a relatively straightforward translation from the original FPDF library written in PHP (despite the caveat in the introduction to Effective Go). The API names have been retained even though the Go idiom would suggest otherwise (for example, pdf.GetX() is used rather than simply pdf.X()). The similarity of the two libraries makes the original FPDF website a good source of information. It includes a forum and FAQ. However, some internal changes have been made. Page content is built up using buffers (of type bytes.Buffer) rather than repeated string concatenation. Errors are handled as explained above rather than panicking. Output is generated through an interface of type io.Writer or io.WriteCloser. A number of the original PHP methods behave differently based on the type of the arguments that are passed to them; in these cases additional methods have been exported to provide similar functionality. Font definition files are produced in JSON rather than PHP. A side effect of running go test ./... is the production of a number of example PDFs. These can be found in the gofpdf/pdf directory after the tests complete. Please note that these examples run in the context of a test. In order run an example as a standalone application, you’ll need to examine fpdf_test.go for some helper routines, for example exampleFilename() and summary(). Example PDFs can be compared with reference copies in order to verify that they have been generated as expected. This comparison will be performed if a PDF with the same name as the example PDF is placed in the gofpdf/pdf/reference directory and if the third argument to ComparePDFFiles() in internal/example/example.go is true. (By default it is false.) The routine that summarizes an example will look for this file and, if found, will call ComparePDFFiles() to check the example PDF for equality with its reference PDF. If differences exist between the two files they will be printed to standard output and the test will fail. If the reference file is missing, the comparison is considered to succeed. In order to successfully compare two PDFs, the placement of internal resources must be consistent and the internal creation timestamps must be the same. To do this, the methods SetCatalogSort() and SetCreationDate() need to be called for both files. This is done automatically for all examples. Nothing special is required to use the standard PDF fonts (courier, helvetica, times, zapfdingbats) in your documents other than calling SetFont(). You should use AddUTF8Font() or AddUTF8FontFromBytes() to add a TrueType UTF-8 encoded font. Use RTL() and LTR() methods switch between “right-to-left” and “left-to-right” mode. In order to use a different non-UTF-8 TrueType or Type1 font, you will need to generate a font definition file and, if the font will be embedded into PDFs, a compressed version of the font file. This is done by calling the MakeFont function or using the included makefont command line utility. To create the utility, cd into the makefont subdirectory and run “go build”. This will produce a standalone executable named makefont. Select the appropriate encoding file from the font subdirectory and run the command as in the following example. In your PDF generation code, call AddFont() to load the font and, as with the standard fonts, SetFont() to begin using it. Most examples, including the package example, demonstrate this method. Good sources of free, open-source fonts include Google Fonts and DejaVu Fonts. The draw2d package is a two dimensional vector graphics library that can generate output in different forms. It uses gofpdf for its document production mode. gofpdf is a global community effort and you are invited to make it even better. If you have implemented a new feature or corrected a problem, please consider contributing your change to the project. A contribution that does not directly pertain to the core functionality of gofpdf should be placed in its own directory directly beneath the contrib directory. Here are guidelines for making submissions. Your change should - be compatible with the MIT License - be properly documented - be formatted with go fmt - include an example in fpdf_test.go if appropriate - conform to the standards of golint and go vet, that is, golint . and go vet . should not generate any warnings - not diminish test coverage Pull requests are the preferred means of accepting your changes. gofpdf is released under the MIT License. It is copyrighted by Kurt Jung and the contributors acknowledged below. This package’s code and documentation are closely derived from the FPDF library created by Olivier Plathey, and a number of font and image resources are copied directly from it. Bruno Michel has provided valuable assistance with the code. Drawing support is adapted from the FPDF geometric figures script by David Hernández Sanz. Transparency support is adapted from the FPDF transparency script by Martin Hall-May. Support for gradients and clipping is adapted from FPDF scripts by Andreas Würmser. Support for outline bookmarks is adapted from Olivier Plathey by Manuel Cornes. Layer support is adapted from Olivier Plathey. Support for transformations is adapted from the FPDF transformation script by Moritz Wagner and Andreas Würmser. PDF protection is adapted from the work of Klemen Vodopivec for the FPDF product. Lawrence Kesteloot provided code to allow an image’s extent to be determined prior to placement. Support for vertical alignment within a cell was provided by Stefan Schroeder. Ivan Daniluk generalized the font and image loading code to use the Reader interface while maintaining backward compatibility. Anthony Starks provided code for the Polygon function. Robert Lillack provided the Beziergon function and corrected some naming issues with the internal curve function. Claudio Felber provided implementations for dashed line drawing and generalized font loading. Stani Michiels provided support for multi-segment path drawing with smooth line joins, line join styles, enhanced fill modes, and has helped greatly with package presentation and tests. Templating is adapted by Marcus Downing from the FPDF_Tpl library created by Jan Slabon and Setasign. Jelmer Snoeck contributed packages that generate a variety of barcodes and help with registering images on the web. Jelmer Snoek and Guillermo Pascual augmented the basic HTML functionality with aligned text. Kent Quirk implemented backwards-compatible support for reading DPI from images that support it, and for setting DPI manually and then having it properly taken into account when calculating image size. Paulo Coutinho provided support for static embedded fonts. Dan Meyers added support for embedded JavaScript. David Fish added a generic alias-replacement function to enable, among other things, table of contents functionality. Andy Bakun identified and corrected a problem in which the internal catalogs were not sorted stably. Paul Montag added encoding and decoding functionality for templates, including images that are embedded in templates; this allows templates to be stored independently of gofpdf. Paul also added support for page boxes used in printing PDF documents. Wojciech Matusiak added supported for word spacing. Artem Korotkiy added support of UTF-8 fonts. Dave Barnes added support for imported objects and templates. Brigham Thompson added support for rounded rectangles. Joe Westcott added underline functionality and optimized image storage. Benoit KUGLER contributed support for rectangles with corners of unequal radius, modification times, and for file attachments and annotations. - Remove all legacy code page font support; use UTF-8 exclusively - Improve test coverage as reported by the coverage tool. Example demonstrates the generation of a simple PDF document. Note that since only core fonts are used (in this case Arial, a synonym for Helvetica), an empty string can be specified for the font directory in the call to New(). Note also that the example.Filename() and example.Summary() functions belong to a separate, internal package and are not part of the gofpdf library. If an error occurs at some point during the construction of the document, subsequent method calls exit immediately and the error is finally retrieved with the output call where it can be handled by the application.

Package gofpdf implements a PDF document generator with high level support for text, drawing and images. - UTF-8 support - Choice of measurement unit, page format and margins - Page header and footer management - Automatic page breaks, line breaks, and text justification - Inclusion of JPEG, PNG, GIF, TIFF and basic path-only SVG images - Colors, gradients and alpha channel transparency - Outline bookmarks - Internal and external links - TrueType, Type1 and encoding support - Page compression - Lines, Bézier curves, arcs, and ellipses - Rotation, scaling, skewing, translation, and mirroring - Clipping - Document protection - Layers - Templates - Barcodes - Charting facility - Import PDFs as templates gofpdf has no dependencies other than the Go standard library. All tests pass on Linux, Mac and Windows platforms. gofpdf supports UTF-8 TrueType fonts and “right-to-left” languages. Note that Chinese, Japanese, and Korean characters may not be included in many general purpose fonts. For these languages, a specialized font (for example, NotoSansSC for simplified Chinese) can be used. Also, support is provided to automatically translate UTF-8 runes to code page encodings for languages that have fewer than 256 glyphs. This repository will not be maintained, at least for some unknown duration. But it is hoped that gofpdf has a bright future in the open source world. Due to Go’s promise of compatibility, gofpdf should continue to function without modification for a longer time than would be the case with many other languages. Forks should be based on the last viable commit. Tools such as active-forks can be used to select a fork that looks promising for your needs. If a particular fork looks like it has taken the lead in attracting followers, this README will be updated to point people in that direction. The efforts of all contributors to this project have been deeply appreciated. Best wishes to all of you. To install the package on your system, run Later, to receive updates, run The following Go code generates a simple PDF file. See the functions in the fpdf_test.go file (shown as examples in this documentation) for more advanced PDF examples. If an error occurs in an Fpdf method, an internal error field is set. After this occurs, Fpdf method calls typically return without performing any operations and the error state is retained. This error management scheme facilitates PDF generation since individual method calls do not need to be examined for failure; it is generally sufficient to wait until after Output() is called. For the same reason, if an error occurs in the calling application during PDF generation, it may be desirable for the application to transfer the error to the Fpdf instance by calling the SetError() method or the SetErrorf() method. At any time during the life cycle of the Fpdf instance, the error state can be determined with a call to Ok() or Err(). The error itself can be retrieved with a call to Error(). This package is a relatively straightforward translation from the original FPDF library written in PHP (despite the caveat in the introduction to Effective Go). The API names have been retained even though the Go idiom would suggest otherwise (for example, pdf.GetX() is used rather than simply pdf.X()). The similarity of the two libraries makes the original FPDF website a good source of information. It includes a forum and FAQ. However, some internal changes have been made. Page content is built up using buffers (of type bytes.Buffer) rather than repeated string concatenation. Errors are handled as explained above rather than panicking. Output is generated through an interface of type io.Writer or io.WriteCloser. A number of the original PHP methods behave differently based on the type of the arguments that are passed to them; in these cases additional methods have been exported to provide similar functionality. Font definition files are produced in JSON rather than PHP. A side effect of running go test ./... is the production of a number of example PDFs. These can be found in the gofpdf/pdf directory after the tests complete. Please note that these examples run in the context of a test. In order run an example as a standalone application, you’ll need to examine fpdf_test.go for some helper routines, for example exampleFilename() and summary(). Example PDFs can be compared with reference copies in order to verify that they have been generated as expected. This comparison will be performed if a PDF with the same name as the example PDF is placed in the gofpdf/pdf/reference directory and if the third argument to ComparePDFFiles() in internal/example/example.go is true. (By default it is false.) The routine that summarizes an example will look for this file and, if found, will call ComparePDFFiles() to check the example PDF for equality with its reference PDF. If differences exist between the two files they will be printed to standard output and the test will fail. If the reference file is missing, the comparison is considered to succeed. In order to successfully compare two PDFs, the placement of internal resources must be consistent and the internal creation timestamps must be the same. To do this, the methods SetCatalogSort() and SetCreationDate() need to be called for both files. This is done automatically for all examples. Nothing special is required to use the standard PDF fonts (courier, helvetica, times, zapfdingbats) in your documents other than calling SetFont(). You should use AddUTF8Font() or AddUTF8FontFromBytes() to add a TrueType UTF-8 encoded font. Use RTL() and LTR() methods switch between “right-to-left” and “left-to-right” mode. In order to use a different non-UTF-8 TrueType or Type1 font, you will need to generate a font definition file and, if the font will be embedded into PDFs, a compressed version of the font file. This is done by calling the MakeFont function or using the included makefont command line utility. To create the utility, cd into the makefont subdirectory and run “go build”. This will produce a standalone executable named makefont. Select the appropriate encoding file from the font subdirectory and run the command as in the following example. In your PDF generation code, call AddFont() to load the font and, as with the standard fonts, SetFont() to begin using it. Most examples, including the package example, demonstrate this method. Good sources of free, open-source fonts include Google Fonts and DejaVu Fonts. The draw2d package is a two dimensional vector graphics library that can generate output in different forms. It uses gofpdf for its document production mode. gofpdf is a global community effort and you are invited to make it even better. If you have implemented a new feature or corrected a problem, please consider contributing your change to the project. A contribution that does not directly pertain to the core functionality of gofpdf should be placed in its own directory directly beneath the contrib directory. Here are guidelines for making submissions. Your change should - be compatible with the MIT License - be properly documented - be formatted with go fmt - include an example in fpdf_test.go if appropriate - conform to the standards of golint and go vet, that is, golint . and go vet . should not generate any warnings - not diminish test coverage Pull requests are the preferred means of accepting your changes. gofpdf is released under the MIT License. It is copyrighted by Kurt Jung and the contributors acknowledged below. This package’s code and documentation are closely derived from the FPDF library created by Olivier Plathey, and a number of font and image resources are copied directly from it. Bruno Michel has provided valuable assistance with the code. Drawing support is adapted from the FPDF geometric figures script by David Hernández Sanz. Transparency support is adapted from the FPDF transparency script by Martin Hall-May. Support for gradients and clipping is adapted from FPDF scripts by Andreas Würmser. Support for outline bookmarks is adapted from Olivier Plathey by Manuel Cornes. Layer support is adapted from Olivier Plathey. Support for transformations is adapted from the FPDF transformation script by Moritz Wagner and Andreas Würmser. PDF protection is adapted from the work of Klemen Vodopivec for the FPDF product. Lawrence Kesteloot provided code to allow an image’s extent to be determined prior to placement. Support for vertical alignment within a cell was provided by Stefan Schroeder. Ivan Daniluk generalized the font and image loading code to use the Reader interface while maintaining backward compatibility. Anthony Starks provided code for the Polygon function. Robert Lillack provided the Beziergon function and corrected some naming issues with the internal curve function. Claudio Felber provided implementations for dashed line drawing and generalized font loading. Stani Michiels provided support for multi-segment path drawing with smooth line joins, line join styles, enhanced fill modes, and has helped greatly with package presentation and tests. Templating is adapted by Marcus Downing from the FPDF_Tpl library created by Jan Slabon and Setasign. Jelmer Snoeck contributed packages that generate a variety of barcodes and help with registering images on the web. Jelmer Snoek and Guillermo Pascual augmented the basic HTML functionality with aligned text. Kent Quirk implemented backwards-compatible support for reading DPI from images that support it, and for setting DPI manually and then having it properly taken into account when calculating image size. Paulo Coutinho provided support for static embedded fonts. Dan Meyers added support for embedded JavaScript. David Fish added a generic alias-replacement function to enable, among other things, table of contents functionality. Andy Bakun identified and corrected a problem in which the internal catalogs were not sorted stably. Paul Montag added encoding and decoding functionality for templates, including images that are embedded in templates; this allows templates to be stored independently of gofpdf. Paul also added support for page boxes used in printing PDF documents. Wojciech Matusiak added supported for word spacing. Artem Korotkiy added support of UTF-8 fonts. Dave Barnes added support for imported objects and templates. Brigham Thompson added support for rounded rectangles. Joe Westcott added underline functionality and optimized image storage. Benoit KUGLER contributed support for rectangles with corners of unequal radius, modification times, and for file attachments and annotations. - Remove all legacy code page font support; use UTF-8 exclusively - Improve test coverage as reported by the coverage tool. Example demonstrates the generation of a simple PDF document. Note that since only core fonts are used (in this case Arial, a synonym for Helvetica), an empty string can be specified for the font directory in the call to New(). Note also that the example.Filename() and example.Summary() functions belong to a separate, internal package and are not part of the gofpdf library. If an error occurs at some point during the construction of the document, subsequent method calls exit immediately and the error is finally retrieved with the output call where it can be handled by the application.

Package gochrome aims to be a complete Chrome DevTools Protocol Viewer implementation. Versioned packages are available. Curently the only version is `tot` or Tip-of-Tree. Stable versions will be made available in the future. This is beta software and hasn't been well exercised in real-world applications. See https://chromedevtools.github.io/devtools-protocol/ The Chrome DevTools Protocol allows for tools to instrument, inspect, debug and profile Chromium, Chrome and other Blink-based browsers. Many existing projects currently use the protocol. The Chrome DevTools uses this protocol and the team maintains its API. Instrumentation is divided into a number of domains (DOM, Debugger, Network etc.). Each domain defines a number of commands it supports and events it generates. Both commands and events are serialized JSON objects of a fixed structure. You can either debug over the wire using the raw messages as they are described in the corresponding domain documentation, or use extension JavaScript API. The latest (tip-of-tree) protocol (tot) It changes frequently and can break at any time. However it captures the full capabilities of the Protocol, whereas the stable release is a subset. There is no backwards compatibility support guaranteed for the capabilities it introduces. Resources Basics: Using DevTools as protocol client The Developer Tools front-end can attach to a remotely running Chrome instance for debugging. For this scenario to work, you should start your host Chrome instance with the remote-debugging-port command line switch: Then you can start a separate client Chrome instance, using a distinct user profile: Now you can navigate to the given port from your client and attach to any of the discovered tabs for debugging: http://localhost:9222 You will find the Developer Tools interface identical to the embedded one and here is why: In this scenario, you can substitute Developer Tools front-end with your own implementation. Instead of navigating to the HTML page at http://localhost:9222, your application can discover available pages by requesting: http://localhost:9222/json and getting a JSON object with information about inspectable pages along with the WebSocket addresses that you could use in order to start instrumenting them. Remote debugging is especially useful when debugging remote instances of the browser or attaching to the embedded devices. Blink port owners are responsible for exposing debugging connections to the external users. This is especially handy to understand how the DevTools frontend makes use of the protocol. First, run Chrome with the debugging port open: Then, select the Chromium Projects item in the Inspectable Pages list. Now that DevTools is up and fullscreen, open DevTools to inspect it. Cmd-R in the new inspector to make the first restart. Now head to Network Panel, filter by Websocket, select the connection and click the Frames tab. Now you can easily see the frames of WebSocket activity as you use the first instance of the DevTools. To allow chrome extensions to interact with the protocol, we introduced chrome.debugger extension API that exposes this JSON message transport interface. As a result, you can not only attach to the remotely running Chrome instance, but also instrument it from its own extension. Chrome Debugger Extension API provides a higher level API where command domain, name and body are provided explicitly in the `sendCommand` call. This API hides request ids and handles binding of the request with its response, hence allowing `sendCommand` to report result in the callback function call. One can also use this API in combination with the other Extension APIs. If you are developing a Web-based IDE, you should implement an extension that exposes debugging capabilities to your page and your IDE will be able to open pages with the target application, set breakpoints there, evaluate expressions in console, live edit JavaScript and CSS, display live DOM, network interaction and any other aspect that Developer Tools is instrumenting today. Opening embedded Developer Tools will terminate the remote connection and thus detach the extension. https://chromedevtools.github.io/devtools-protocol/#simultaneous The canonical protocol definitions live in the Chromium source tree: (browser_protocol.json and js_protocol.json). They are maintained manually by the DevTools engineering team. These files are mirrored (hourly) on GitHub in the devtools-protocol repo. The declarative protocol definitions are used across tools. Within Chromium, a binding layer is created for the Chrome DevTools to interact with, and separately the protocol is used for Chrome Headless’s C++ interface. What’s the protocol_externs file It’s created via generate_protocol_externs.py and useful for tools using closure compiler. The TypeScript story is here. Not yet. See bugger-daemon’s third-party docs. See also the endpoints implementation in Chromium. /json/protocol was added in Chrome 60. The endpoint is exposed as webSocketDebuggerUrl in /json/version. Note the browser in the URL, rather than page. If Chrome was launched with --remote-debugging-port=0 and chose an open port, the browser endpoint is written to both stderr and the DevToolsActivePort file in browser profile folder. Yes, as of Chrome 63! See Multi-client remote debugging support. Upon disconnnection, the outgoing client will receive a detached event. For example: View the enum of possible reasons. (For reference: the original patch). After disconnection, some apps have chosen to pause their state and offer a reconnect button.

Package raws currently provides simplicity - one package vs multitude in AWS - as well as multi-region management - all calls are done for each selected region(s). Region's parameter also supports globbing, thus allowing to fetch data from all eu with: 'eu-*' or all eu-west with 'eu-west-*' Currently only a couple of the most used information is gathered, but adding extra calls should not be complicated, as they all have the same logic. For the sake of avoiding repetitive documentation, each function that this package contains with the context.Context type as a first parameter, won't be documented, at least if there is not special usage of it inside of the function, because the context.Context is provided for implementing the most adopted concurrency pattern, used by the Go community (see https://blog.golang.org/context).

Package conn defines core interfaces for protocols and connections. This package and its subpackages describe the base interfaces to connect the software with the real world. It doesn't contain any implementation but includes registries to enable the application to discover the available hardware. periph uses 3 layered concepts for interfacing: Not every subpackage expose all 3 concepts. In fact, most packages don't. For example, SPI doesn't expose Bus as the OSes generally only expose the Port, that is, a Chip Select (CS) line must be selected right upfront to get an handle. For I²C, there's no Port to configure, so selecting a "slave" address is sufficient to jump directly from a Bus to a Conn. periph doesn't have yet a concept of star-like communication network, like an IP network. A Bus is a multi-point communication channel where one "master" and multiple "slaves" communicate together. In the case of periph, the Bus handle is assumed to be the "master". The "master" generally initiates communications and selects the "slave" to talk to. As the "master" selects a "slave" over a bus, a virtual Port is automatically created. Examples include SPI, I²C and 1-wire. In each case, selecting a communication line (Chip Select (CS) line for SPI, address for I²C or 1-wire) converts the Bus into a Port. A port is a point-to-point communication channel that is yet to be initialized. It cannot be used for communication until it is connected and transformed into a Conn. Configuring a Port converts it into a Conn. Not all Port need configuration. A Conn is a fully configured half or full duplex communication channel that is point-to-point, only between two devices. It is ready to use like any readable and/or writable pipe. Most connection-type specific subpackages include subpackages: → XXXreg: registry as that is populated by the host drivers and that can be leveraged by applications. → XXXtest: fake implementation that can be leveraged when writing device driver unit test.

Package gofpdf implements a PDF document generator with high level support for text, drawing and images. - UTF-8 support - Choice of measurement unit, page format and margins - Page header and footer management - Automatic page breaks, line breaks, and text justification - Inclusion of JPEG, PNG, GIF, TIFF and basic path-only SVG images - Colors, gradients and alpha channel transparency - Outline bookmarks - Internal and external links - TrueType, Type1 and encoding support - Page compression - Lines, Bézier curves, arcs, and ellipses - Rotation, scaling, skewing, translation, and mirroring - Clipping - Document protection - Layers - Templates - Barcodes - Charting facility - Import PDFs as templates gofpdf has no dependencies other than the Go standard library. All tests pass on Linux, Mac and Windows platforms. gofpdf supports UTF-8 TrueType fonts and “right-to-left” languages. Note that Chinese, Japanese, and Korean characters may not be included in many general purpose fonts. For these languages, a specialized font (for example, NotoSansSC for simplified Chinese) can be used. Also, support is provided to automatically translate UTF-8 runes to code page encodings for languages that have fewer than 256 glyphs. To install the package on your system, run Later, to receive updates, run The following Go code generates a simple PDF file. See the functions in the fpdf_test.go file (shown as examples in this documentation) for more advanced PDF examples. If an error occurs in an Fpdf method, an internal error field is set. After this occurs, Fpdf method calls typically return without performing any operations and the error state is retained. This error management scheme facilitates PDF generation since individual method calls do not need to be examined for failure; it is generally sufficient to wait until after Output() is called. For the same reason, if an error occurs in the calling application during PDF generation, it may be desirable for the application to transfer the error to the Fpdf instance by calling the SetError() method or the SetErrorf() method. At any time during the life cycle of the Fpdf instance, the error state can be determined with a call to Ok() or Err(). The error itself can be retrieved with a call to Error(). This package is a relatively straightforward translation from the original FPDF library written in PHP (despite the caveat in the introduction to Effective Go). The API names have been retained even though the Go idiom would suggest otherwise (for example, pdf.GetX() is used rather than simply pdf.X()). The similarity of the two libraries makes the original FPDF website a good source of information. It includes a forum and FAQ. However, some internal changes have been made. Page content is built up using buffers (of type bytes.Buffer) rather than repeated string concatenation. Errors are handled as explained above rather than panicking. Output is generated through an interface of type io.Writer or io.WriteCloser. A number of the original PHP methods behave differently based on the type of the arguments that are passed to them; in these cases additional methods have been exported to provide similar functionality. Font definition files are produced in JSON rather than PHP. A side effect of running go test ./... is the production of a number of example PDFs. These can be found in the gofpdf/pdf directory after the tests complete. Please note that these examples run in the context of a test. In order run an example as a standalone application, you’ll need to examine fpdf_test.go for some helper routines, for example exampleFilename() and summary(). Example PDFs can be compared with reference copies in order to verify that they have been generated as expected. This comparison will be performed if a PDF with the same name as the example PDF is placed in the gofpdf/pdf/reference directory and if the third argument to ComparePDFFiles() in internal/example/example.go is true. (By default it is false.) The routine that summarizes an example will look for this file and, if found, will call ComparePDFFiles() to check the example PDF for equality with its reference PDF. If differences exist between the two files they will be printed to standard output and the test will fail. If the reference file is missing, the comparison is considered to succeed. In order to successfully compare two PDFs, the placement of internal resources must be consistent and the internal creation timestamps must be the same. To do this, the methods SetCatalogSort() and SetCreationDate() need to be called for both files. This is done automatically for all examples. Nothing special is required to use the standard PDF fonts (courier, helvetica, times, zapfdingbats) in your documents other than calling SetFont(). You should use AddUTF8Font() or AddUTF8FontFromBytes() to add a TrueType UTF-8 encoded font. Use RTL() and LTR() methods switch between “right-to-left” and “left-to-right” mode. In order to use a different non-UTF-8 TrueType or Type1 font, you will need to generate a font definition file and, if the font will be embedded into PDFs, a compressed version of the font file. This is done by calling the MakeFont function or using the included makefont command line utility. To create the utility, cd into the makefont subdirectory and run “go build”. This will produce a standalone executable named makefont. Select the appropriate encoding file from the font subdirectory and run the command as in the following example. In your PDF generation code, call AddFont() to load the font and, as with the standard fonts, SetFont() to begin using it. Most examples, including the package example, demonstrate this method. Good sources of free, open-source fonts include Google Fonts and DejaVu Fonts. The draw2d package is a two dimensional vector graphics library that can generate output in different forms. It uses gofpdf for its document production mode. gofpdf is a global community effort and you are invited to make it even better. If you have implemented a new feature or corrected a problem, please consider contributing your change to the project. A contribution that does not directly pertain to the core functionality of gofpdf should be placed in its own directory directly beneath the contrib directory. Here are guidelines for making submissions. Your change should - be compatible with the MIT License - be properly documented - be formatted with go fmt - include an example in fpdf_test.go if appropriate - conform to the standards of golint and go vet, that is, golint . and go vet . should not generate any warnings - not diminish test coverage Pull requests are the preferred means of accepting your changes. gofpdf is released under the MIT License. It is copyrighted by Kurt Jung and the contributors acknowledged below. This package’s code and documentation are closely derived from the FPDF library created by Olivier Plathey, and a number of font and image resources are copied directly from it. Bruno Michel has provided valuable assistance with the code. Drawing support is adapted from the FPDF geometric figures script by David Hernández Sanz. Transparency support is adapted from the FPDF transparency script by Martin Hall-May. Support for gradients and clipping is adapted from FPDF scripts by Andreas Würmser. Support for outline bookmarks is adapted from Olivier Plathey by Manuel Cornes. Layer support is adapted from Olivier Plathey. Support for transformations is adapted from the FPDF transformation script by Moritz Wagner and Andreas Würmser. PDF protection is adapted from the work of Klemen Vodopivec for the FPDF product. Lawrence Kesteloot provided code to allow an image’s extent to be determined prior to placement. Support for vertical alignment within a cell was provided by Stefan Schroeder. Ivan Daniluk generalized the font and image loading code to use the Reader interface while maintaining backward compatibility. Anthony Starks provided code for the Polygon function. Robert Lillack provided the Beziergon function and corrected some naming issues with the internal curve function. Claudio Felber provided implementations for dashed line drawing and generalized font loading. Stani Michiels provided support for multi-segment path drawing with smooth line joins, line join styles, enhanced fill modes, and has helped greatly with package presentation and tests. Templating is adapted by Marcus Downing from the FPDF_Tpl library created by Jan Slabon and Setasign. Jelmer Snoeck contributed packages that generate a variety of barcodes and help with registering images on the web. Jelmer Snoek and Guillermo Pascual augmented the basic HTML functionality with aligned text. Kent Quirk implemented backwards-compatible support for reading DPI from images that support it, and for setting DPI manually and then having it properly taken into account when calculating image size. Paulo Coutinho provided support for static embedded fonts. Dan Meyers added support for embedded JavaScript. David Fish added a generic alias-replacement function to enable, among other things, table of contents functionality. Andy Bakun identified and corrected a problem in which the internal catalogs were not sorted stably. Paul Montag added encoding and decoding functionality for templates, including images that are embedded in templates; this allows templates to be stored independently of gofpdf. Paul also added support for page boxes used in printing PDF documents. Wojciech Matusiak added supported for word spacing. Artem Korotkiy added support of UTF-8 fonts. Dave Barnes added support for imported objects and templates. Brigham Thompson added support for rounded rectangles. Joe Westcott added underline functionality and optimized image storage. Benoit KUGLER contributed support for rectangles with corners of unequal radius, modification times, and for file attachments and annotations. - Remove all legacy code page font support; use UTF-8 exclusively - Improve test coverage as reported by the coverage tool. Example demonstrates the generation of a simple PDF document. Note that since only core fonts are used (in this case Arial, a synonym for Helvetica), an empty string can be specified for the font directory in the call to New(). Note also that the example.Filename() and example.Summary() functions belong to a separate, internal package and are not part of the gofpdf library. If an error occurs at some point during the construction of the document, subsequent method calls exit immediately and the error is finally retrieved with the output call where it can be handled by the application.

Package dragonboat is a feature complete and highly optimized multi-group Raft implementation for providing consensus in distributed systems. The NodeHost struct is the facade interface for all features provided by the dragonboat package. Each NodeHost instance usually runs on a separate server managing CPU, storage and network resources used for achieving consensus. Each NodeHost manages Raft nodes from different Raft groups known as Raft shards. Each Raft shard is identified by its ShardID, it usually consists of multiple nodes (also known as replicas) each identified by a ReplicaID value. Nodes from the same Raft shard suppose to be distributed on different NodeHost instances across the network, this brings fault tolerance for machine and network failures as application data stored in the Raft shard will be available as long as the majority of its managing NodeHost instances (i.e. its underlying servers) are accessible. Arbitrary number of Raft shards can be launched across the network to aggregate distributed processing and storage capacities. Users can also make membership change requests to add or remove nodes from selected Raft shard. User applications can leverage the power of the Raft protocol by implementing the IStateMachine or IOnDiskStateMachine component, as defined in github.com/foreeest/dragonboat/statemachine. Known as user state machines, each IStateMachine or IOnDiskStateMachine instance is in charge of updating, querying and snapshotting application data with minimum exposure to the Raft protocol itself. Dragonboat guarantees the linearizability of your I/O when interacting with the IStateMachine or IOnDiskStateMachine instances. In plain English, writes (via making proposals) to your Raft shard appears to be instantaneous, once a write is completed, all later reads (via linearizable read based on Raft's ReadIndex protocol) should return the value of that write or a later write. Once a value is returned by a linearizable read, all later reads should return the same value or the result of a later write. To strictly provide such guarantee, we need to implement the at-most-once semantic. For a client, when it retries the proposal that failed to complete by its deadline, it faces the risk of having the same proposal committed and applied twice into the user state machine. Dragonboat prevents this by implementing the client session concept described in Diego Ongaro's PhD thesis.

Package gofpdf implements a PDF document generator with high level support for text, drawing and images. - UTF-8 support - Choice of measurement unit, page format and margins - Page header and footer management - Automatic page breaks, line breaks, and text justification - Inclusion of JPEG, PNG, GIF, TIFF and basic path-only SVG images - Colors, gradients and alpha channel transparency - Outline bookmarks - Internal and external links - TrueType, Type1 and encoding support - Page compression - Lines, Bézier curves, arcs, and ellipses - Rotation, scaling, skewing, translation, and mirroring - Clipping - Document protection - Layers - Templates - Barcodes - Charting facility - Import PDFs as templates gofpdf has no dependencies other than the Go standard library. All tests pass on Linux, Mac and Windows platforms. gofpdf supports UTF-8 TrueType fonts and “right-to-left” languages. Note that Chinese, Japanese, and Korean characters may not be included in many general purpose fonts. For these languages, a specialized font (for example, NotoSansSC for simplified Chinese) can be used. Also, support is provided to automatically translate UTF-8 runes to code page encodings for languages that have fewer than 256 glyphs. To install the package on your system, run Later, to receive updates, run The following Go code generates a simple PDF file. See the functions in the fpdf_test.go file (shown as examples in this documentation) for more advanced PDF examples. If an error occurs in an Fpdf method, an internal error field is set. After this occurs, Fpdf method calls typically return without performing any operations and the error state is retained. This error management scheme facilitates PDF generation since individual method calls do not need to be examined for failure; it is generally sufficient to wait until after Output() is called. For the same reason, if an error occurs in the calling application during PDF generation, it may be desirable for the application to transfer the error to the Fpdf instance by calling the SetError() method or the SetErrorf() method. At any time during the life cycle of the Fpdf instance, the error state can be determined with a call to Ok() or Err(). The error itself can be retrieved with a call to Error(). This package is a relatively straightforward translation from the original FPDF library written in PHP (despite the caveat in the introduction to Effective Go). The API names have been retained even though the Go idiom would suggest otherwise (for example, pdf.GetX() is used rather than simply pdf.X()). The similarity of the two libraries makes the original FPDF website a good source of information. It includes a forum and FAQ. However, some internal changes have been made. Page content is built up using buffers (of type bytes.Buffer) rather than repeated string concatenation. Errors are handled as explained above rather than panicking. Output is generated through an interface of type io.Writer or io.WriteCloser. A number of the original PHP methods behave differently based on the type of the arguments that are passed to them; in these cases additional methods have been exported to provide similar functionality. Font definition files are produced in JSON rather than PHP. A side effect of running go test ./... is the production of a number of example PDFs. These can be found in the gofpdf/pdf directory after the tests complete. Please note that these examples run in the context of a test. In order run an example as a standalone application, you’ll need to examine fpdf_test.go for some helper routines, for example exampleFilename() and summary(). Example PDFs can be compared with reference copies in order to verify that they have been generated as expected. This comparison will be performed if a PDF with the same name as the example PDF is placed in the gofpdf/pdf/reference directory and if the third argument to ComparePDFFiles() in internal/example/example.go is true. (By default it is false.) The routine that summarizes an example will look for this file and, if found, will call ComparePDFFiles() to check the example PDF for equality with its reference PDF. If differences exist between the two files they will be printed to standard output and the test will fail. If the reference file is missing, the comparison is considered to succeed. In order to successfully compare two PDFs, the placement of internal resources must be consistent and the internal creation timestamps must be the same. To do this, the methods SetCatalogSort() and SetCreationDate() need to be called for both files. This is done automatically for all examples. Nothing special is required to use the standard PDF fonts (courier, helvetica, times, zapfdingbats) in your documents other than calling SetFont(). You should use AddUTF8Font() or AddUTF8FontFromBytes() to add a TrueType UTF-8 encoded font. Use RTL() and LTR() methods switch between “right-to-left” and “left-to-right” mode. In order to use a different non-UTF-8 TrueType or Type1 font, you will need to generate a font definition file and, if the font will be embedded into PDFs, a compressed version of the font file. This is done by calling the MakeFont function or using the included makefont command line utility. To create the utility, cd into the makefont subdirectory and run “go build”. This will produce a standalone executable named makefont. Select the appropriate encoding file from the font subdirectory and run the command as in the following example. In your PDF generation code, call AddFont() to load the font and, as with the standard fonts, SetFont() to begin using it. Most examples, including the package example, demonstrate this method. Good sources of free, open-source fonts include Google Fonts and DejaVu Fonts. The draw2d package is a two dimensional vector graphics library that can generate output in different forms. It uses gofpdf for its document production mode. gofpdf is a global community effort and you are invited to make it even better. If you have implemented a new feature or corrected a problem, please consider contributing your change to the project. A contribution that does not directly pertain to the core functionality of gofpdf should be placed in its own directory directly beneath the contrib directory. Here are guidelines for making submissions. Your change should - be compatible with the MIT License - be properly documented - be formatted with go fmt - include an example in fpdf_test.go if appropriate - conform to the standards of golint and go vet, that is, golint . and go vet . should not generate any warnings - not diminish test coverage Pull requests are the preferred means of accepting your changes. gofpdf is released under the MIT License. It is copyrighted by Kurt Jung and the contributors acknowledged below. This package’s code and documentation are closely derived from the FPDF library created by Olivier Plathey, and a number of font and image resources are copied directly from it. Bruno Michel has provided valuable assistance with the code. Drawing support is adapted from the FPDF geometric figures script by David Hernández Sanz. Transparency support is adapted from the FPDF transparency script by Martin Hall-May. Support for gradients and clipping is adapted from FPDF scripts by Andreas Würmser. Support for outline bookmarks is adapted from Olivier Plathey by Manuel Cornes. Layer support is adapted from Olivier Plathey. Support for transformations is adapted from the FPDF transformation script by Moritz Wagner and Andreas Würmser. PDF protection is adapted from the work of Klemen Vodopivec for the FPDF product. Lawrence Kesteloot provided code to allow an image’s extent to be determined prior to placement. Support for vertical alignment within a cell was provided by Stefan Schroeder. Ivan Daniluk generalized the font and image loading code to use the Reader interface while maintaining backward compatibility. Anthony Starks provided code for the Polygon function. Robert Lillack provided the Beziergon function and corrected some naming issues with the internal curve function. Claudio Felber provided implementations for dashed line drawing and generalized font loading. Stani Michiels provided support for multi-segment path drawing with smooth line joins, line join styles, enhanced fill modes, and has helped greatly with package presentation and tests. Templating is adapted by Marcus Downing from the FPDF_Tpl library created by Jan Slabon and Setasign. Jelmer Snoeck contributed packages that generate a variety of barcodes and help with registering images on the web. Jelmer Snoek and Guillermo Pascual augmented the basic HTML functionality with aligned text. Kent Quirk implemented backwards-compatible support for reading DPI from images that support it, and for setting DPI manually and then having it properly taken into account when calculating image size. Paulo Coutinho provided support for static embedded fonts. Dan Meyers added support for embedded JavaScript. David Fish added a generic alias-replacement function to enable, among other things, table of contents functionality. Andy Bakun identified and corrected a problem in which the internal catalogs were not sorted stably. Paul Montag added encoding and decoding functionality for templates, including images that are embedded in templates; this allows templates to be stored independently of gofpdf. Paul also added support for page boxes used in printing PDF documents. Wojciech Matusiak added supported for word spacing. Artem Korotkiy added support of UTF-8 fonts. Dave Barnes added support for imported objects and templates. Brigham Thompson added support for rounded rectangles. Joe Westcott added underline functionality and optimized image storage. Benoit KUGLER contributed support for rectangles with corners of unequal radius, modification times, and for file attachments and annotations. - Remove all legacy code page font support; use UTF-8 exclusively - Improve test coverage as reported by the coverage tool. Example demonstrates the generation of a simple PDF document. Note that since only core fonts are used (in this case Arial, a synonym for Helvetica), an empty string can be specified for the font directory in the call to New(). Note also that the example.Filename() and example.Summary() functions belong to a separate, internal package and are not part of the gofpdf library. If an error occurs at some point during the construction of the document, subsequent method calls exit immediately and the error is finally retrieved with the output call where it can be handled by the application.

Package remotessh provides host connectivity in go for system/integration testing in a multi host environment. It supports two testbed environments viz. baremetal and vagrant Use this library to do remote testing with baremetal or vagrant nodes. For example, To setup a baremetal setup with a host node with ssh reachability '1.2.3.4' and port '22' for user 'foo', you can initialize the setup as: Or to auto connect to a vagrant based setup you can initialize the setup as: Once you have your favorite setup initialized, this will select the "mynode" node and run "ls" on it. If you want to walk nodes, you have a few options: Sequentially: In Parallel: Copyright 2014 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.

A dynamic and extensible music library organizer Demlo is a music library organizer. It can encode, fix case, change folder hierarchy according to tags or file properties, tag from an online database, copy covers while ignoring duplicates or those below a quality threshold, and much more. It makes it possible to manage your libraries uniformly and dynamically. You can write your own rules to fit your needs best. Demlo aims at being as lightweight and portable as possible. Its major runtime dependency is the transcoder FFmpeg. The scripts are written in Lua for portability and speed while allowing virtually unlimited extensibility. Usage: For usage options, see: First Demlo creates a list of all input files. When a folder is specified, all files matching the extensions from the 'extensions' variable will be appended to the list. Identical files are appended only once. Next all files get analyzed: - The audio file details (tags, stream properties, format properties, etc.) are stored into the 'input' variable. The 'output' variable gets its default values from 'input', or from an index file if specified from command-line. If no index has been specified and if an attached cuesheet is found, all cuesheet details are appended accordingly. Cuesheet tags override stream tags, which override format tags. Finally, still without index, tags can be retrieved from Internet if the command-line option is set. - If a prescript has been specified, it gets executed. It makes it possible to adjust the input values and global variables before running the other scripts. - The scripts, if any, get executed in the lexicographic order of their basename. The 'output' variable is transformed accordingly. Scripts may contain rules such as defining a new file name, new tags, new encoding properties, etc. You can use conditions on input values to set the output properties, which makes it virtually possible to process a full music library in one single run. - If a postscript has been specified, it gets executed. It makes it possible to adjust the output of the script for the current run only. - Demlo makes some last-minute tweaking if need be: it adjusts the bitrate, the path, the encoding parameters, and so on. - A preview of changes is displayed. - When applying changes, the covers get copied if required and the audio file gets processed: tags are modified as specified, the file is re-encoded if required, and the output is written to the appropriate folder. When destination already exists, the 'exist' action is executed. The program's default behaviour can be changed from the user configuration file. (See the 'Files' section for a template.) Most command-line flags default value can be changed. The configuration file is loaded on startup, before parsing the command-line options. Review the default value of the CLI flags with 'demlo -h'. If you wish to use no configuration file, set the environment variable DEMLORC to ".". Scripts can contain any safe Lua code. Some functions like 'os.execute' are not available for security reasons. It is not possible to print to the standard output/error unless running in debug mode and using the 'debug' function. See the 'sandbox.go' file for a list of allowed functions and variables. Lua patterns are replaced by Go regexps. See https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax. Scripts have no requirements at all. However, to be useful, they should set values of the 'output' table detailed in the 'Variables' section. You can use the full power of the Lua to set the variables dynamically. For instance: 'input' and 'output' are both accessible from any script. All default functions and variables (excluding 'output') are reset on every script call to enforce consistency. Local variables are lost from one script call to another. Global variables are preserved. Use this feature to pass data like options or new functions. 'output' structure consistency is guaranteed at the start of every script. Demlo will only extract the fields with the right type as described in the 'Variables' section. Warning: Do not abuse of global variables, especially when processing non-fixed size data (e.g. tables). Data could grow big and slow down the program. By default, when the destination exists, Demlo will append a suffix to the output destination. This behaviour can be changed from the 'exist' action specified by the user. Demlo comes with a few default actions. The 'exist' action works just like scripts with the following differences: - Any change to 'output.path' will be skipped. - An additional variable is accessible from the action: 'existinfo' holds the file details of the existing files in the same fashion as 'input'. This allows for comparing the input file and the existing destination. The writing rules can be tweaked the following way: Word of caution: overwriting breaks Demlo's rule of not altering existing files. It can lead to undesired results if the overwritten file is also part of the (yet to be processed) input. The overwrite capability can be useful when syncing music libraries however. The user scripts should be generic. Therefore they may not properly handle some uncommon input values. Tweak the input with temporary overrides from command-line. The prescript and postscript defined on command-line will let you run arbitrary code that is run before and after all other scripts, respectively. Use global variables to transfer data and parameters along. If the prescript and postscript end up being too long, consider writing a demlo script. You can also define shell aliases or use wrapper scripts as convenience. The 'input' table describes the file: Bitrate is in bits per seconds (bps). That is, for 320 kbps you would specify The 'time' is the modification time of the file. It holds the sec seconds and nsec nanoseconds since January 1, 1970 UTC. The entry 'streams' and 'format' are as returned by It gives access to most metadata that FFmpeg can return. For instance, to get the duration of the track in seconds, query the variable 'input.format.duration'. Since there may be more than one stream (covers, other data), the first audio stream is assumed to be the music stream. For convenience, the index of the music stream is stored in 'audioindex'. The tags returned by FFmpeg are found in streams, format and in the cuesheet. To make tag queries easier, all tags are stored in the 'tags' table, with the following precedence: You can remove a tag by setting it to 'nil' or the empty string. This is equivalent, except that 'nil' saves some memory during the process. The 'output' table describes the transformation to apply to the file: The 'parameters' array holds the CLI parameters passed to FFmpeg. It can be anything supported by FFmpeg, although this variable is supposed to hold encoding information. See the 'Examples' section. The 'embeddedcovers', 'externalcovers' and 'onlinecover' variables are detailed in the 'Covers' section. The 'write' variable is covered in the 'Existing destination' section. The 'rmsrc' variable is a boolean: when true, Demlo removes the source file after processing. This can speed up the process when not re-encoding. This option is ignored for multi-track files. For convenience, the following shortcuts are provided: Demlo provides some non-standard Lua functions to ease scripting. Display a message on stderr if debug mode is on. Return lowercase string without non-alphanumeric characters nor leading zeros. Return the relation coefficient of the two input strings. The result is a float in 0.0...1.0, 0.0 means no relation at all, 1.0 means identical strings. A format is a container in FFmpeg's terminology. 'output.parameters' contains CLI flags passed to FFmpeg. They are meant to set the stream codec, the bitrate, etc. If 'output.parameters' is {'-c:a', 'copy'} and the format is identical, then taglib will be used instead of FFmpeg. Use this rule from a (post)script to disable encoding by setting the same format and the copy parameters. This speeds up the process. The official scripts are usually very smart at guessing the right values. They might make mistakes however. If you are unsure, you can (and you are advised to) preview the results before proceeding. The 'diff' preview is printed to stderr. A JSON preview of the changes is printed to stdout if stdout is redirected. The initial values of the 'output' table can be completed with tags fetched from the MusicBrainz database. Audio files are fingerprinted for the queries, so even with initially wrong file names and tags, the right values should still be retrieved. The front album cover can also be retrieved. Proxy parameters will be fetched automatically from the 'http_proxy' and 'https_proxy' environment variables. As this process requires network access it can be quite slow. Nevertheless, Demlo is specifically optimized for albums, so that network queries are used for only one track per album, when possible. Some tracks can be released on different albums: Demlo tries to guess it from the tags, but if the tags are wrong there is no way to know which one it is. There is a case where the selection can be controlled: let's assume we have tracks A, B and C from the same album Z. A and B were also released in album Y, whereas C was release in Z only. Tags for A will be checked online; let's assume it gets tagged to album Y. B will use A details, so album Y too. Then C does not match neither A's nor B's album, so another online query will be made and it will be tagged to album Z. This is slow and does not yield the expected result. Now let's call Tags for C will be queried online, and C will be tagged to Z. Then both A and B will match album Z so they will be tagged using C details, which is the desired result. Conclusion: when using online tagging, the first argument should be the lesser known track of the album. Demlo can set the output variables according to the values set in a text file before calling the script. The input values are ignored as well as online tagging, but it is still possible to access the input table from scripts. This 'index' file is formatted in JSON. It corresponds to what Demlo outputs when printing the JSON preview. This is valid JSON except for the missing beginning and the missing end. It makes it possible to concatenate and to append to existing index files. Demlo will automatically complete the missing parts so that it becomes valid JSON. The index file is useful when you want to edit tags manually: You can redirect the output to a file, edit the content manually with your favorite text editor, then run Demlo again with the index as argument. See the 'Examples' section. This feature can also be used to interface Demlo with other programs. Demlo can manage embedded covers as well as external covers. External covers are queried from files matching known extensions in the file's folder. Embedded covers are queried from static video streams in the file. Covers are accessed from The embedded covers are indexed numerically by order of appearance in the streams. The first cover will be at index 1 and so on. This is not necessarily the index of the stream. 'inputcover' is the following structure: 'format' is the picture format. FFmpeg makes a distinction between format and codec, but it is not useful for covers. The name of the format is specified by Demlo, not by FFmpeg. Hence the 'jpeg' name, instead of 'mjpeg' as FFmpeg puts it. 'width' and 'height' hold the size in pixels. 'checksum' can be used to identify files uniquely. For performance reasons, only a partial checksum is performed. This variable is typically used for skipping duplicates. Cover transformations are specified in 'outputcover' has the following structure: The format is specified by FFmpeg this time. See the comments on 'format' for 'inputcover'. 'parameters' is used in the same fashion as 'output.parameters'. User configuration: This must be a Lua file. See the 'demlorc' file provided with this package for an exhaustive list of options. Folder containing the official scripts: User script folder: Create this folder and add your own scripts inside. This folder takes precedence over the system folder, so scripts with the same name will be found in the user folder first. The following examples will not proceed unless the '-p' command-line option is true. Important: you _must_ use single quotes for the runtime Lua command to prevent expansion. Inside the Lua code, use double quotes for strings and escape single quotes. Show default options: Preview changes made by the default scripts: Use 'alternate' script if found in user or system script folder (user folder first): Add the Lua file to the list of scripts. This feature is convenient if you want to write scripts that are too complex to fit on the command-line, but not generic enough to fit the user or system script folders. Remove all script from the list, then add '30-case' and '60-path' scripts. Note that '30-case' will be run before '60-path'. Do not use any script but '60-path'. The file content is unchanged and the file is renamed to a dynamically computed destination. Demlo performs an instant rename if destination is on the same device. Otherwise it copies the file and removes the source. Use the default scripts (if set in configuration file), but do not re-encode: Set 'artist' to the value of 'composer', and 'title' to be preceded by the new value of 'artist', then apply the default script. Do not re-encode. Order in runtime script matters. Mind the double quotes. Set track number to first number in input file name: Use the default scripts but keep original value for the 'artist' tag: 1) Preview default scripts transformation and save it to an index. 2) Edit file to fix any potential mistake. 3) Run Demlo over the same files using the index information only. Same as above but generate output filename according to the custom '61-rename' script. The numeric prefix is important: it ensures that '61-rename' will be run after all the default tag related scripts and after '60-path'. Otherwise, if a change in tags would occur later on, it would not affect the renaming script. Retrieve tags from Internet: Same as above but for a whole album, and saving the result to an index: Only download the cover for the album corresponding to the track. Use 'rmsrc' to avoid duplicating the audio file. Change tags inplace with entries from MusicBrainz: Set tags to titlecase while casing AC-DC correctly: To easily switch between formats from command-line, create one script per format (see 50-encoding.lua), e.g. ogg.lua and flac.lua. Then Add support for non-default formats from CLI: Overwrite existing destination if input is newer: ffmpeg(1), ffprobe(1), http://www.lua.org/pil/contents.html

Package gofpdf implements a PDF document generator with high level support for text, drawing and images. • Choice of measurement unit, page format and margins • Page header and footer management • Automatic page breaks, line breaks, and text justification • Inclusion of JPEG, PNG, GIF, TIFF and basic path-only SVG images • Colors, gradients and alpha channel transparency • Outline bookmarks • Internal and external links • TrueType, Type1 and encoding support • Page compression • Lines, Bézier curves, arcs, and ellipses • Rotation, scaling, skewing, translation, and mirroring • Clipping • Document protection • Layers • Templates • Barcodes gofpdf has no dependencies other than the Go standard library. All tests pass on Linux, Mac and Windows platforms. Like FPDF version 1.7, from which gofpdf is derived, this package does not yet support UTF-8 fonts. In particular, languages that require more than one code page such as Chinese, Japanese, and Arabic are not currently supported. This is explained in issue 109. However, support is provided to automatically translate UTF-8 runes to code page encodings for languages that have fewer than 256 glyphs. To install the package on your system, run Later, to receive updates, run The following Go code generates a simple PDF file. See the functions in the fpdf_test.go file (shown as examples in this documentation) for more advanced PDF examples. If an error occurs in an Fpdf method, an internal error field is set. After this occurs, Fpdf method calls typically return without performing any operations and the error state is retained. This error management scheme facilitates PDF generation since individual method calls do not need to be examined for failure; it is generally sufficient to wait until after Output() is called. For the same reason, if an error occurs in the calling application during PDF generation, it may be desirable for the application to transfer the error to the Fpdf instance by calling the SetError() method or the SetErrorf() method. At any time during the life cycle of the Fpdf instance, the error state can be determined with a call to Ok() or Err(). The error itself can be retrieved with a call to Error(). This package is a relatively straightforward translation from the original FPDF library written in PHP (despite the caveat in the introduction to Effective Go). The API names have been retained even though the Go idiom would suggest otherwise (for example, pdf.GetX() is used rather than simply pdf.X()). The similarity of the two libraries makes the original FPDF website a good source of information. It includes a forum and FAQ. However, some internal changes have been made. Page content is built up using buffers (of type bytes.Buffer) rather than repeated string concatenation. Errors are handled as explained above rather than panicking. Output is generated through an interface of type io.Writer or io.WriteCloser. A number of the original PHP methods behave differently based on the type of the arguments that are passed to them; in these cases additional methods have been exported to provide similar functionality. Font definition files are produced in JSON rather than PHP. A side effect of running "go test ./..." is the production of a number of example PDFs. These can be found in the gofpdf/pdf directory after the tests complete. Please note that these examples run in the context of a test. In order run an example as a standalone application, you'll need to examine fpdf_test.go for some helper routines, for example exampleFilename() and summary(). Example PDFs can be compared with reference copies in order to verify that they have been generated as expected. This comparison will be performed if a PDF with the same name as the example PDF is placed in the gofpdf/pdf/reference directory. The routine that summarizes an example will look for this file and, if found, will call ComparePDFFiles() to check the example PDF for equality with its reference PDF. If differences exist between the two files they will be printed to standard output and the test will fail. If the reference file is missing, the comparison is considered to succeed. In order to successfully compare two PDFs, the placement of internal resources must be consistent and the internal creation timestamps must be the same. To do this, the methods SetCatalogSort() and SetCreationDate() need to be called for both files. This is done automatically for all examples. Nothing special is required to use the standard PDF fonts (courier, helvetica, times, zapfdingbats) in your documents other than calling SetFont(). In order to use a different TrueType or Type1 font, you will need to generate a font definition file and, if the font will be embedded into PDFs, a compressed version of the font file. This is done by calling the MakeFont function or using the included makefont command line utility. To create the utility, cd into the makefont subdirectory and run "go build". This will produce a standalone executable named makefont. Select the appropriate encoding file from the font subdirectory and run the command as in the following example. In your PDF generation code, call AddFont() to load the font and, as with the standard fonts, SetFont() to begin using it. Most examples, including the package example, demonstrate this method. Good sources of free, open-source fonts include http://www.google.com/fonts/ and http://dejavu-fonts.org/. The draw2d package (https://github.com/llgcode/draw2d) is a two dimensional vector graphics library that can generate output in different forms. It uses gofpdf for its document production mode. gofpdf is a global community effort and you are invited to make it even better. If you have implemented a new feature or corrected a problem, please consider contributing your change to the project. A contribution that does not directly pertain to the core functionality of gofpdf should be placed in its own directory directly beneath the `contrib` directory. Here are guidelines for making submissions. Your change should • be compatible with the MIT License • be properly documented • be formatted with `go fmt` • include an example in fpdf_test.go if appropriate • conform to the standards of golint (https://github.com/golang/lint) and go vet (https://godoc.org/golang.org/x/tools/cmd/vet), that is, `golint .` and `go vet .` should not generate any warnings • not diminish test coverage (https://blog.golang.org/cover) Pull requests (https://help.github.com/articles/using-pull-requests/) work nicely as a means of contributing your changes. gofpdf is released under the MIT License. It is copyrighted by Kurt Jung and the contributors acknowledged below. This package's code and documentation are closely derived from the FPDF library (http://www.fpdf.org/) created by Olivier Plathey, and a number of font and image resources are copied directly from it. Drawing support is adapted from the FPDF geometric figures script by David Hernández Sanz. Transparency support is adapted from the FPDF transparency script by Martin Hall-May. Support for gradients and clipping is adapted from FPDF scripts by Andreas Würmser. Support for outline bookmarks is adapted from Olivier Plathey by Manuel Cornes. Layer support is adapted from Olivier Plathey. Support for transformations is adapted from the FPDF transformation script by Moritz Wagner and Andreas Würmser. PDF protection is adapted from the work of Klemen Vodopivec for the FPDF product. Lawrence Kesteloot provided code to allow an image's extent to be determined prior to placement. Support for vertical alignment within a cell was provided by Stefan Schroeder. Ivan Daniluk generalized the font and image loading code to use the Reader interface while maintaining backward compatibility. Anthony Starks provided code for the Polygon function. Robert Lillack provided the Beziergon function and corrected some naming issues with the internal curve function. Claudio Felber provided implementations for dashed line drawing and generalized font loading. Stani Michiels provided support for multi-segment path drawing with smooth line joins, line join styles, enhanced fill modes, and has helped greatly with package presentation and tests. Templating is adapted by Marcus Downing from the FPDF_Tpl library created by Jan Slabon and Setasign. Jelmer Snoeck contributed packages that generate a variety of barcodes and help with registering images on the web. Jelmer Snoek and Guillermo Pascual augmented the basic HTML functionality with aligned text. Kent Quirk implemented backwards-compatible support for reading DPI from images that support it, and for setting DPI manually and then having it properly taken into account when calculating image size. Paulo Coutinho provided support for static embedded fonts. Bruno Michel has provided valuable assistance with the code. • Handle UTF-8 source text natively. Until then, automatic translation of UTF-8 runes to code page bytes is provided. • Improve test coverage as reported by the coverage tool. This example demonstrates the generation of a simple PDF document. Note that since only core fonts are used (in this case Arial, a synonym for Helvetica), an empty string can be specified for the font directory in the call to New(). Note also that the example.Filename() and example.Summary() functions belong to a separate, internal package and are not part of the gofpdf library. If an error occurs at some point during the construction of the document, subsequent method calls exit immediately and the error is finally retrieved with the output call where it can be handled by the application.

Package remotessh provides host connectivity in go for system/integration testing in a multi host environment. It supports two testbed environments viz. baremetal and vagrant Use this library to do remote testing with baremetal or vagrant nodes. For example, To setup a baremetal setup with a host node with ssh reachability '1.2.3.4' and port '22' for user 'foo', you can initialize the setup as: Or to auto connect to a vagrant based setup you can initialize the setup as: Once you have your favorite setup initialized, this will select the "mynode" node and run "ls" on it. If you want to walk nodes, you have a few options: Sequentially: In Parallel: Copyright 2014 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.

Package gofpdf implements a PDF document generator with high level support for text, drawing and images. - UTF-8 support - Choice of measurement unit, page format and margins - Page header and footer management - Automatic page breaks, line breaks, and text justification - Inclusion of JPEG, PNG, GIF, TIFF and basic path-only SVG images - Colors, gradients and alpha channel transparency - Outline bookmarks - Internal and external links - TrueType, Type1 and encoding support - Page compression - Lines, Bézier curves, arcs, and ellipses - Rotation, scaling, skewing, translation, and mirroring - Clipping - Document protection - Layers - Templates - Barcodes - Charting facility - Import PDFs as templates gofpdf has no dependencies other than the Go standard library. All tests pass on Linux, Mac and Windows platforms. gofpdf supports UTF-8 TrueType fonts and “right-to-left” languages. Note that Chinese, Japanese, and Korean characters may not be included in many general purpose fonts. For these languages, a specialized font (for example, NotoSansSC for simplified Chinese) can be used. Also, support is provided to automatically translate UTF-8 runes to code page encodings for languages that have fewer than 256 glyphs. This repository will not be maintained, at least for some unknown duration. But it is hoped that gofpdf has a bright future in the open source world. Due to Go’s promise of compatibility, gofpdf should continue to function without modification for a longer time than would be the case with many other languages. Forks should be based on the last viable commit. Tools such as active-forks can be used to select a fork that looks promising for your needs. If a particular fork looks like it has taken the lead in attracting followers, this README will be updated to point people in that direction. The efforts of all contributors to this project have been deeply appreciated. Best wishes to all of you. To install the package on your system, run Later, to receive updates, run The following Go code generates a simple PDF file. See the functions in the fpdf_test.go file (shown as examples in this documentation) for more advanced PDF examples. If an error occurs in an Fpdf method, an internal error field is set. After this occurs, Fpdf method calls typically return without performing any operations and the error state is retained. This error management scheme facilitates PDF generation since individual method calls do not need to be examined for failure; it is generally sufficient to wait until after Output() is called. For the same reason, if an error occurs in the calling application during PDF generation, it may be desirable for the application to transfer the error to the Fpdf instance by calling the SetError() method or the SetErrorf() method. At any time during the life cycle of the Fpdf instance, the error state can be determined with a call to Ok() or Err(). The error itself can be retrieved with a call to Error(). This package is a relatively straightforward translation from the original FPDF library written in PHP (despite the caveat in the introduction to Effective Go). The API names have been retained even though the Go idiom would suggest otherwise (for example, pdf.GetX() is used rather than simply pdf.X()). The similarity of the two libraries makes the original FPDF website a good source of information. It includes a forum and FAQ. However, some internal changes have been made. Page content is built up using buffers (of type bytes.Buffer) rather than repeated string concatenation. Errors are handled as explained above rather than panicking. Output is generated through an interface of type io.Writer or io.WriteCloser. A number of the original PHP methods behave differently based on the type of the arguments that are passed to them; in these cases additional methods have been exported to provide similar functionality. Font definition files are produced in JSON rather than PHP. A side effect of running go test ./... is the production of a number of example PDFs. These can be found in the gofpdf/pdf directory after the tests complete. Please note that these examples run in the context of a test. In order run an example as a standalone application, you’ll need to examine fpdf_test.go for some helper routines, for example exampleFilename() and summary(). Example PDFs can be compared with reference copies in order to verify that they have been generated as expected. This comparison will be performed if a PDF with the same name as the example PDF is placed in the gofpdf/pdf/reference directory and if the third argument to ComparePDFFiles() in internal/example/example.go is true. (By default it is false.) The routine that summarizes an example will look for this file and, if found, will call ComparePDFFiles() to check the example PDF for equality with its reference PDF. If differences exist between the two files they will be printed to standard output and the test will fail. If the reference file is missing, the comparison is considered to succeed. In order to successfully compare two PDFs, the placement of internal resources must be consistent and the internal creation timestamps must be the same. To do this, the methods SetCatalogSort() and SetCreationDate() need to be called for both files. This is done automatically for all examples. Nothing special is required to use the standard PDF fonts (courier, helvetica, times, zapfdingbats) in your documents other than calling SetFont(). You should use AddUTF8Font() or AddUTF8FontFromBytes() to add a TrueType UTF-8 encoded font. Use RTL() and LTR() methods switch between “right-to-left” and “left-to-right” mode. In order to use a different non-UTF-8 TrueType or Type1 font, you will need to generate a font definition file and, if the font will be embedded into PDFs, a compressed version of the font file. This is done by calling the MakeFont function or using the included makefont command line utility. To create the utility, cd into the makefont subdirectory and run “go build”. This will produce a standalone executable named makefont. Select the appropriate encoding file from the font subdirectory and run the command as in the following example. In your PDF generation code, call AddFont() to load the font and, as with the standard fonts, SetFont() to begin using it. Most examples, including the package example, demonstrate this method. Good sources of free, open-source fonts include Google Fonts and DejaVu Fonts. The draw2d package is a two dimensional vector graphics library that can generate output in different forms. It uses gofpdf for its document production mode. gofpdf is a global community effort and you are invited to make it even better. If you have implemented a new feature or corrected a problem, please consider contributing your change to the project. A contribution that does not directly pertain to the core functionality of gofpdf should be placed in its own directory directly beneath the contrib directory. Here are guidelines for making submissions. Your change should - be compatible with the MIT License - be properly documented - be formatted with go fmt - include an example in fpdf_test.go if appropriate - conform to the standards of golint and go vet, that is, golint . and go vet . should not generate any warnings - not diminish test coverage Pull requests are the preferred means of accepting your changes. gofpdf is released under the MIT License. It is copyrighted by Kurt Jung and the contributors acknowledged below. This package’s code and documentation are closely derived from the FPDF library created by Olivier Plathey, and a number of font and image resources are copied directly from it. Bruno Michel has provided valuable assistance with the code. Drawing support is adapted from the FPDF geometric figures script by David Hernández Sanz. Transparency support is adapted from the FPDF transparency script by Martin Hall-May. Support for gradients and clipping is adapted from FPDF scripts by Andreas Würmser. Support for outline bookmarks is adapted from Olivier Plathey by Manuel Cornes. Layer support is adapted from Olivier Plathey. Support for transformations is adapted from the FPDF transformation script by Moritz Wagner and Andreas Würmser. PDF protection is adapted from the work of Klemen Vodopivec for the FPDF product. Lawrence Kesteloot provided code to allow an image’s extent to be determined prior to placement. Support for vertical alignment within a cell was provided by Stefan Schroeder. Ivan Daniluk generalized the font and image loading code to use the Reader interface while maintaining backward compatibility. Anthony Starks provided code for the Polygon function. Robert Lillack provided the Beziergon function and corrected some naming issues with the internal curve function. Claudio Felber provided implementations for dashed line drawing and generalized font loading. Stani Michiels provided support for multi-segment path drawing with smooth line joins, line join styles, enhanced fill modes, and has helped greatly with package presentation and tests. Templating is adapted by Marcus Downing from the FPDF_Tpl library created by Jan Slabon and Setasign. Jelmer Snoeck contributed packages that generate a variety of barcodes and help with registering images on the web. Jelmer Snoek and Guillermo Pascual augmented the basic HTML functionality with aligned text. Kent Quirk implemented backwards-compatible support for reading DPI from images that support it, and for setting DPI manually and then having it properly taken into account when calculating image size. Paulo Coutinho provided support for static embedded fonts. Dan Meyers added support for embedded JavaScript. David Fish added a generic alias-replacement function to enable, among other things, table of contents functionality. Andy Bakun identified and corrected a problem in which the internal catalogs were not sorted stably. Paul Montag added encoding and decoding functionality for templates, including images that are embedded in templates; this allows templates to be stored independently of gofpdf. Paul also added support for page boxes used in printing PDF documents. Wojciech Matusiak added supported for word spacing. Artem Korotkiy added support of UTF-8 fonts. Dave Barnes added support for imported objects and templates. Brigham Thompson added support for rounded rectangles. Joe Westcott added underline functionality and optimized image storage. Benoit KUGLER contributed support for rectangles with corners of unequal radius, modification times, and for file attachments and annotations. - Remove all legacy code page font support; use UTF-8 exclusively - Improve test coverage as reported by the coverage tool. Example demonstrates the generation of a simple PDF document. Note that since only core fonts are used (in this case Arial, a synonym for Helvetica), an empty string can be specified for the font directory in the call to New(). Note also that the example.Filename() and example.Summary() functions belong to a separate, internal package and are not part of the gofpdf library. If an error occurs at some point during the construction of the document, subsequent method calls exit immediately and the error is finally retrieved with the output call where it can be handled by the application.

Package gofpdf implements a PDF document generator with high level support for text, drawing and images. - UTF-8 support - Choice of measurement unit, page format and margins - Page header and footer management - Automatic page breaks, line breaks, and text justification - Inclusion of JPEG, PNG, GIF, TIFF and basic path-only SVG images - Colors, gradients and alpha channel transparency - Outline bookmarks - Internal and external links - TrueType, Type1 and encoding support - Page compression - Lines, Bézier curves, arcs, and ellipses - Rotation, scaling, skewing, translation, and mirroring - Clipping - Document protection - Layers - Templates - Barcodes - Charting facility - Import PDFs as templates gofpdf has no dependencies other than the Go standard library. All tests pass on Linux, Mac and Windows platforms. gofpdf supports UTF-8 TrueType fonts and “right-to-left” languages. Note that Chinese, Japanese, and Korean characters may not be included in many general purpose fonts. For these languages, a specialized font (for example, NotoSansSC for simplified Chinese) can be used. Also, support is provided to automatically translate UTF-8 runes to code page encodings for languages that have fewer than 256 glyphs. This repository will not be maintained, at least for some unknown duration. But it is hoped that gofpdf has a bright future in the open source world. Due to Go’s promise of compatibility, gofpdf should continue to function without modification for a longer time than would be the case with many other languages. Forks should be based on the last viable commit. Tools such as active-forks can be used to select a fork that looks promising for your needs. If a particular fork looks like it has taken the lead in attracting followers, this README will be updated to point people in that direction. The efforts of all contributors to this project have been deeply appreciated. Best wishes to all of you. To install the package on your system, run Later, to receive updates, run The following Go code generates a simple PDF file. See the functions in the fpdf_test.go file (shown as examples in this documentation) for more advanced PDF examples. If an error occurs in an Fpdf method, an internal error field is set. After this occurs, Fpdf method calls typically return without performing any operations and the error state is retained. This error management scheme facilitates PDF generation since individual method calls do not need to be examined for failure; it is generally sufficient to wait until after Output() is called. For the same reason, if an error occurs in the calling application during PDF generation, it may be desirable for the application to transfer the error to the Fpdf instance by calling the SetError() method or the SetErrorf() method. At any time during the life cycle of the Fpdf instance, the error state can be determined with a call to Ok() or Err(). The error itself can be retrieved with a call to Error(). This package is a relatively straightforward translation from the original FPDF library written in PHP (despite the caveat in the introduction to Effective Go). The API names have been retained even though the Go idiom would suggest otherwise (for example, pdf.GetX() is used rather than simply pdf.X()). The similarity of the two libraries makes the original FPDF website a good source of information. It includes a forum and FAQ. However, some internal changes have been made. Page content is built up using buffers (of type bytes.Buffer) rather than repeated string concatenation. Errors are handled as explained above rather than panicking. Output is generated through an interface of type io.Writer or io.WriteCloser. A number of the original PHP methods behave differently based on the type of the arguments that are passed to them; in these cases additional methods have been exported to provide similar functionality. Font definition files are produced in JSON rather than PHP. A side effect of running go test ./... is the production of a number of example PDFs. These can be found in the gofpdf/pdf directory after the tests complete. Please note that these examples run in the context of a test. In order run an example as a standalone application, you’ll need to examine fpdf_test.go for some helper routines, for example exampleFilename() and summary(). Example PDFs can be compared with reference copies in order to verify that they have been generated as expected. This comparison will be performed if a PDF with the same name as the example PDF is placed in the gofpdf/pdf/reference directory and if the third argument to ComparePDFFiles() in internal/example/example.go is true. (By default it is false.) The routine that summarizes an example will look for this file and, if found, will call ComparePDFFiles() to check the example PDF for equality with its reference PDF. If differences exist between the two files they will be printed to standard output and the test will fail. If the reference file is missing, the comparison is considered to succeed. In order to successfully compare two PDFs, the placement of internal resources must be consistent and the internal creation timestamps must be the same. To do this, the methods SetCatalogSort() and SetCreationDate() need to be called for both files. This is done automatically for all examples. Nothing special is required to use the standard PDF fonts (courier, helvetica, times, zapfdingbats) in your documents other than calling SetFont(). You should use AddUTF8Font() or AddUTF8FontFromBytes() to add a TrueType UTF-8 encoded font. Use RTL() and LTR() methods switch between “right-to-left” and “left-to-right” mode. In order to use a different non-UTF-8 TrueType or Type1 font, you will need to generate a font definition file and, if the font will be embedded into PDFs, a compressed version of the font file. This is done by calling the MakeFont function or using the included makefont command line utility. To create the utility, cd into the makefont subdirectory and run “go build”. This will produce a standalone executable named makefont. Select the appropriate encoding file from the font subdirectory and run the command as in the following example. In your PDF generation code, call AddFont() to load the font and, as with the standard fonts, SetFont() to begin using it. Most examples, including the package example, demonstrate this method. Good sources of free, open-source fonts include Google Fonts and DejaVu Fonts. The draw2d package is a two dimensional vector graphics library that can generate output in different forms. It uses gofpdf for its document production mode. gofpdf is a global community effort and you are invited to make it even better. If you have implemented a new feature or corrected a problem, please consider contributing your change to the project. A contribution that does not directly pertain to the core functionality of gofpdf should be placed in its own directory directly beneath the contrib directory. Here are guidelines for making submissions. Your change should - be compatible with the MIT License - be properly documented - be formatted with go fmt - include an example in fpdf_test.go if appropriate - conform to the standards of golint and go vet, that is, golint . and go vet . should not generate any warnings - not diminish test coverage Pull requests are the preferred means of accepting your changes. gofpdf is released under the MIT License. It is copyrighted by Kurt Jung and the contributors acknowledged below. This package’s code and documentation are closely derived from the FPDF library created by Olivier Plathey, and a number of font and image resources are copied directly from it. Bruno Michel has provided valuable assistance with the code. Drawing support is adapted from the FPDF geometric figures script by David Hernández Sanz. Transparency support is adapted from the FPDF transparency script by Martin Hall-May. Support for gradients and clipping is adapted from FPDF scripts by Andreas Würmser. Support for outline bookmarks is adapted from Olivier Plathey by Manuel Cornes. Layer support is adapted from Olivier Plathey. Support for transformations is adapted from the FPDF transformation script by Moritz Wagner and Andreas Würmser. PDF protection is adapted from the work of Klemen Vodopivec for the FPDF product. Lawrence Kesteloot provided code to allow an image’s extent to be determined prior to placement. Support for vertical alignment within a cell was provided by Stefan Schroeder. Ivan Daniluk generalized the font and image loading code to use the Reader interface while maintaining backward compatibility. Anthony Starks provided code for the Polygon function. Robert Lillack provided the Beziergon function and corrected some naming issues with the internal curve function. Claudio Felber provided implementations for dashed line drawing and generalized font loading. Stani Michiels provided support for multi-segment path drawing with smooth line joins, line join styles, enhanced fill modes, and has helped greatly with package presentation and tests. Templating is adapted by Marcus Downing from the FPDF_Tpl library created by Jan Slabon and Setasign. Jelmer Snoeck contributed packages that generate a variety of barcodes and help with registering images on the web. Jelmer Snoek and Guillermo Pascual augmented the basic HTML functionality with aligned text. Kent Quirk implemented backwards-compatible support for reading DPI from images that support it, and for setting DPI manually and then having it properly taken into account when calculating image size. Paulo Coutinho provided support for static embedded fonts. Dan Meyers added support for embedded JavaScript. David Fish added a generic alias-replacement function to enable, among other things, table of contents functionality. Andy Bakun identified and corrected a problem in which the internal catalogs were not sorted stably. Paul Montag added encoding and decoding functionality for templates, including images that are embedded in templates; this allows templates to be stored independently of gofpdf. Paul also added support for page boxes used in printing PDF documents. Wojciech Matusiak added supported for word spacing. Artem Korotkiy added support of UTF-8 fonts. Dave Barnes added support for imported objects and templates. Brigham Thompson added support for rounded rectangles. Joe Westcott added underline functionality and optimized image storage. Benoit KUGLER contributed support for rectangles with corners of unequal radius, modification times, and for file attachments and annotations. - Remove all legacy code page font support; use UTF-8 exclusively - Improve test coverage as reported by the coverage tool. Example demonstrates the generation of a simple PDF document. Note that since only core fonts are used (in this case Arial, a synonym for Helvetica), an empty string can be specified for the font directory in the call to New(). Note also that the example.Filename() and example.Summary() functions belong to a separate, internal package and are not part of the gofpdf library. If an error occurs at some point during the construction of the document, subsequent method calls exit immediately and the error is finally retrieved with the output call where it can be handled by the application.